JP7370848B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, which are examples of gaming machines, include electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

Furthermore, in pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, which are examples of gaming machines, it is possible to execute a battle performance and a timer performance at the same time as a reach performance, and during a battle performance, a slow playback speed that slows down the playback speed of the battle performance is possible. There are some that can further perform motion effects (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it gives players a sense of discomfort .

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable .

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The electronic component is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
In the second period, after displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect that displays a still image obtained by freezing the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even while the static presentation is being executed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means;
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, control can be performed according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, when the variable display of display symbols in a variable display game completely stops, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-80649, the stopped symbol mode becomes a specific display mode. , the player becomes in an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state), and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the player enters a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special state is entered without going through the jackpot gaming state. There was something there. However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the control during state transition, and in view of this, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the control of state transition and increase the enjoyment of the game. is required.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second production unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second production unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third performance unit and a fourth performance unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. It is a figure showing composition of a 3rd production unit and a 4th production unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a time saving type determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving promotion effect period. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a diagram showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of a decoration pattern stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of remaining reservation period end determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a pending change determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when a dropout occurs. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time-saving promotion production setting processing. It is a diagram showing an example of determining a time-saving effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a return effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display in the case where the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing within information output processing. 5 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in external information output processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 063AK. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device related to the feature part 063AK in a state where the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the big winning hole related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a distribution section related to the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the distribution member related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the distribution section related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation|movement of the distribution member based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the small hit start performance time related to the characteristic part 063AK and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution part. (a) is a timing chart of the performance corresponding to small hit fluctuations related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining whether or not a performance is executed and the performance mode corresponding to small hit fluctuations related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion performance related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a time-saving suggestion symbol related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining the normal passing excitement effect corresponding to the first special figure game related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the normal passing excitement effect corresponding to the second special figure game related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram for explaining the time-saving time-passing effect related to the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first special figure display result determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the second special figure display result determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a list of jackpot types related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a list of small hit types related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table related to the feature section 063AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of variation patterns related to the characteristic part 063AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table related to the feature section 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a normal state time saving variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing related to the feature part 063AK. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start performance waiting time determination table related to the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening preprocessing concerning characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small hit opening based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the winning end designation command determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end process based on the characteristic part 063AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing decorative patterns that are small winning combinations related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table for time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display regarding the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure waiting process related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start performance time determination table related to the feature section 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during a small hit related to the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit end production process related to the feature part 063AK. (a) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a normal-time suspension change determination table according to a modification of the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a limit hold change determination table according to a modified example of the characteristic section 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams illustrating an example of a production operation according to a modification of the characteristic part 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 065AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal map display result and the number of times of time saving. It is a figure showing a special figure display result and the number of times of time saving. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a common figure interlocking production control process. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special figure interlocking production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart showing the performance contents at the time of time saving transition of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific member is characterized in that the brightness or saturation of the color is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, since the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, it is possible to make the electronic component relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine described in Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The light transmittance of the boundary corresponding area is lower than the light transmittance of the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decorative part 420 emits light by being emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 801), a presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The presentation section (e.g., the light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., the third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (for example, third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine described in Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc., are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 to perform a performance (a process for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power supply stop, using, for example, a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of the gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be in an open state in the small winning game state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which a gaming hall attendant or the like can confirm the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch that can be operated by an attendant of the game hall are provided in the setting changeover main body, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. If the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric components for the performance according to the program read from the ROM91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and CPU91AK131 performs various types of data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. You can. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data), etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, display data created by drawing processing is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Furthermore, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that configures the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensation predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient as long as it indicates the unit of the unit in a recognizable manner. Furthermore, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", the decision cannot be made. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. When the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. It's okay. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows setting the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Further, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with a moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display is performed that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach performance of SP Reach A, even in the video display period that is the common content of the performance display, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF, The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the production execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decorations as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, when the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information can be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, if "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect by displaying a text image using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Furthermore, if different video image data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video image display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

In the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK, when an effect using a moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect using a text image display using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the contents of the performance. Additionally, since text image display effects are added using text image data that is stored separately from the video image data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data or an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to control the display appropriately so that it can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component regarding the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and increases in data volume and processing load are prevented. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "Very hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image showing the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Very hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. The text image display style that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display aspect including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is displayed in black and has no text decoration.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and no text decoration is set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to a gold effect display setting. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if you set the character decoration of the text image to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show a display example in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91 AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the text image display color to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of the following: display control that allows changes to be made depending on the content of the video, or display control that allows text images to be added and displayed using common text image data for multiple video images. It is also possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image. You can. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. It's okay.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize, for example.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images, not limited to those used in display effects, is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so it is easier to design effects for displaying text images. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color by returning to red again. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. The player's movements are not limited to those that can be detected, but are based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control on the detection target, or changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, but is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, when it is a special period, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than when it is a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range that is a period other than the special period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to display an effect image added to the surrounding area. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, etc. , it is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data regarding a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 01AKA1, a first pending display area 01AKB1, a second pending display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, an active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be one that has the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common to the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since it is an image showing the numbers given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When executing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By performing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is You can change the image and draw the generated image.

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to perform a blurring process. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing color information included in image data. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, which becomes a background image, in a displayable manner.

The display layer in which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to which it is drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (forward) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and players will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a larger value is assigned as the Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is designated by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that, for example, any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 performs drawing on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It is sufficient to store the images in a frame buffer for screen display while composing them according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses it for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

In this way, the VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using the image data stored in the predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK123 and the VRAM91AK147. Furthermore, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image to be drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. On the other hand, an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn in accordance with image data.

When a display list that does not include effect drawing commands but includes normal display drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute normal drawing synthesis processing that is different from effect drawing synthesis processing. In normal drawing composition processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the VRAM91AK147. The data may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, has the color information of the image data changed without executing color blending for effects. It can be drawn for screen display without having to do so.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are respectively specified. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as background images, effects images showing decorative patterns, effects images that increase chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that show pending display, active display, and small symbols, etc., for the progress of the game. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing effect drawing synthesis processing. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. Difference calculation processing is processing for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as a specific drawing process, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, use a composition process that performs color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, the image data is It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are converted into image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, the image data is converted as a specific drawing process by coordinate value conversion processing that changes the offset amount of the image position. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data through normal drawing processing.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are super reach effects with lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a super reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "Strong SP Reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. It is. Therefore, when the SP reach A1 reach effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" only about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach performance content may include a performance mode in which some commonality can be recognized. For example, a common moving image may be played back and displayed as a background image for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, a common character image may be displayed as an animation for SP reach A1 to A3. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode that makes it possible to recognize the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, for SP Reach B, a moving image different from that for SP Reach A1 to A3 may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP Reach B, a character image different from that in SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode in which one of SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized as different from other cases. For example, different moving images may be played back and displayed as background images for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, character images different from each other may be displayed as animations in SP reaches A1 to A3. Other presentation modes that can be used to recognize differences include arbitrary displays on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary displays using light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. Any movement using a movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these may be used.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using, for example, command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a rate according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, depending on the variable display result and the content of the reach effect, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "Lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5/100). /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined, and at a rate of 5% (5/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect is executed, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, the content is higher than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 cannot be determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the super reach effect, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the reach performance of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if the game is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that even when the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until execution of the ready-to-win effect is started after the ready-to-win effect is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies a performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in a reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the performance execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may be possible to perform the performance.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the super reach reach performance etc. are executed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01 is selected. Regardless of whether this is the case, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. In the performance execution period D2 which is after the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. In the specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, for example, in specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative pattern etc. that will be a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a judgment result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is sufficient if it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, and for example, in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the amount of light emitting effect compared to when the light emitting effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member in the light emitting effect (brightness) than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of execution of an effect when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among cases where a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed as appropriate in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect outputs from reach establishment to super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach reach performance changes to the super reach reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the super reach reach performance progresses during the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, corresponding to the production execution period D1, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after the chance up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR with the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed in response to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows a performance execution example 02AKM08 in which a final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, the normal drawing effect NOR with light emitting effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in performance execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing the image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a strobe display in response to a drawing command, the normal drawing effect NOR is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of production execution example 02AKM23, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance-up production during reach that was started in production execution example 02AKM21. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM23, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-12(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25 in the case where, following performance execution example 02AKM24, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-13(A) shows a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 when, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting section mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is only necessary that the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern, etc. during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern. On the other hand, the button light emission effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2, which displays and renders an effect image corresponding to a pending display or an active display, may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In the setting where layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the pending display or active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information etc. may be changed. When a specific drawing performance SPE using a monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is only necessary that the performance image corresponding to the pending display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While it is possible to display such monochrome display of pending display and active display, if it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of specific display related to variable display such as pending display and active display, specific drawing effect SPE If a change effect is executed during the execution of , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. If the change performance includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change performance of the successful pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, When the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the pending display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the start port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing the light emitting member to emit light even during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute or not to perform the performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the suggestion display layer is The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform a variety of display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the special layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result to the assist time (also referred to as AT), which is the executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be emitted during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal manner, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal manner. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects according to effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering effect that temporarily stops and displays an image, such as a specific rendering effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. Yes, the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, and a second pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is executed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, and to display a specific drawing process such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance, for example, in the case of the second pattern. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02 AKC01, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific effect, and in response to displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process in a specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emitting effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific production, it is possible to execute a light emission production by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing in a specific production, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. You may also choose not to display the image. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and the setting means is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image.For example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image is The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration in which images can be displayed using a specific layer, a special layer can be drawn using a specific drawing process to display an effect image, and a special layer with a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn using a normal drawing process. It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is assumed to be the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is assumed to be the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at a position below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided above the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right side position of the board 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided in which game balls flowing down the gaming area Y can win prizes.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B). It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine unevenness state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is guided and emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

Note that when the light guide plate 501 is in a state where no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting area 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, a portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but a portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. 501 may be constructed using a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface). In addition, the reflective section can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condensing lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 is It becomes possible to expand. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be caused to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is repeatedly totally reflected in the front and rear direction, and is condensed toward the approximately central position in the front and rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the condenser lens 504 The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate does not diffuse the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-to-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 on the front surface of the light guide plate 501 emits surface light. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. In FIGS. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit viewed diagonally from the front. In Figure 10-9, (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7. FIG. 5 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first production unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. It is mainly composed of a cover member 302, which is attached to the base member 302, and an LED board 303, which is attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized through the glass window 50a and the board 200.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E, which form part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Furthermore, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat part 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (to be described later) is located in front of the flat part 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by disposing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are It is difficult to see the boundary between BD and BD. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is placed in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first transparent section 321. It is difficult for the first performance LED 304 to be visually recognized from the player side through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is selected from among the plurality of decorative patterns 331. ) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative parts 331B and 331C made of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is arranged between two members (LED By being provided across the board 303 and cover member 302), one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, so that the LED board 303 and cover member 302 on the back side It becomes difficult to recognize that they are separate parts.

In addition, a portion of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 becomes difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decorative parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Note that since the decorative parts 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary part BD, the overlapping area with the boundary part BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 overlaps the LED board 303 and the cover. By being formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern 320 and the wiring pattern 320 are similar (or common), it becomes difficult to tell them apart, so that the LED board 303 becomes difficult to stand out.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, thereby making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is positioned below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, in a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By providing this, it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention, so that it is less noticeable.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303, which would normally not be visible to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side, where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second starting winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which players P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of the.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first light transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, light that is transmitted in the T direction is transmitted. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front surface. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (low transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover plate 702A (for example, When viewing a predetermined portion (for example, the first performance LED 304 or LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 from the player side through the cover member 302, than when viewing the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is placed closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second presentation LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production section 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that is translucent, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Further, a light diffusing section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further transmitted to the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth production unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left part, it is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third presentation LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth presentation LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. It is covered with member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually check the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusion section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), an LED board 803 as an electronic component having a fourth presentation LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 802 is formed with the light diffusing section 802A, the cover member 802 cannot be seen from the player's side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle-type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the player side is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , the form is illustrated in which it is configured as a presentation means with higher visibility than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility because it differs from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is provided a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is applied as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the frame 3 for the game machine. It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in the area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixedly installed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic components and specific members. It may be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period in which the light emission performance section 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. 506, the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player's side. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

Furthermore, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emitting production of the light emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the production period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member that constitutes a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses an electronic component as described above, it may be a member that is provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3). (a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 forming part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or housed are applied as the light-transmitting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the member does not constitute a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If a member is provided so that a player can see through the electronic component and the specific member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, for example, a specific member located within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as the translucent members, but the present invention applies thereto. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through the member by the player, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so as to be visible through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members, the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the entire surface of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 is colored in a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of parts of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the transparent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If it is, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be of similar color. Furthermore, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored during the molding of the components, by painting or printing after molding, or by pasting stickers, etc. You can leave it there.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82 that are difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes them is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue as the electronic component and has either higher brightness or saturation, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Furthermore, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, thereby making the electronic component less noticeable.

Further, for example, in a case where electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, an electronic component such as a black LED board may be installed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side with the image display device 5 in between. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color as the electronic component separately from the specific component so as to be visible to the player, the black component can be arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member of the same color or similar color as the electronic component at a separate position from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic parts 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed on the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic part 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the electronic components of the second presentation unit 400, the third presentation unit 600, and the fourth presentation unit 800 become less noticeable, so that the above-mentioned presentation can be presented suitably.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 etc. In the case of controlling the electronic parts (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, the game effect lamp 9 It may also be possible to control the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 (or to make the light amount lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the light amount may be maintained (not restricted in execution) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the numbers are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also include a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine , 75SG001), which includes an electronic component (for example, an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803) that is provided so as to be visible to the player, and which is provided around the electronic component and is formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component. a specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801), and a translucent member that allows the player to see the electronic component and the specific member through the member. transparent members (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802), and predetermined electronic components (e.g., first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B) that are difficult or impossible to see from the player. , solenoids 81, 82, etc.), and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, members for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.). , a game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control unit that executes a performance based on a performance control command) CPU 120, etc.), and the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) is formed to straddle the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). The game controller has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) (see FIGS. 10-12), the predetermined member has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component, and the game control means determines to set the advantageous state. determining means (for example, the CPU 103, etc., which executes the process of step S110), and determining means (for example, the CPU 103, etc., which executes the process of step S213), which determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means, A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059 AKS025, etc.); Information transmitting means (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a production control command, etc.) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the state is controlled to the production execution means, and the state control means , when a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, control is performed from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, the process of step 059 AKS025 ), the determination means is capable of determining that the special state is entered before the state control means controls to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001), The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, a display result designation command of "Loss (time saving)" When receiving the determination result information, the effect execution means is capable of executing a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is capable of executing the process of step S161, etc.). ), if the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, step 059AKS084 and step S1304 (e.g., executing the processing of) gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, control can be performed according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design. In order to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the judgment result information, the judgment result information judged after being controlled to the special state is, for example, a judgment result that causes the special state to end. It is possible to avoid a situation where the interest in the game is actually reduced due to the pre-read performance, such as when the game is known in advance. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and does not easily reduce interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and improve gaming enjoyment, a variable display is performed, and when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, the player A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on information from the game control means. The game control means is equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance, and the game control means determines that the advantageous state is set (for example, a step). (such as the CPU 103 that executes the process in step S110), a determination unit that determines whether the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the determination unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process in step S213, etc.), and a display that is more variable than the normal state. A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025, etc.) capable of controlling to a special state in which it is likely to be executed, and specifying that control is performed to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is reached. information transmitting means (for example, CPU 103 for transmitting a production control command) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including possible determination result information to the production execution means; When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, control is performed from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025), The determining means is capable of determining that the special state is entered before the state controlling means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001), and the information transmitting means When the determination means determines that the special state is reached, it is possible to transmit special information that can specify that the control is to be performed in the special state (for example, it is possible to transmit a display result designation command of "loss (time saving)", etc. ), the effect execution means is capable of executing a prefetch effect based on the judgment result information (for example, can execute the process of step S161) when receiving the judgment result information, and executes the special information. If the determination result information is received after receiving the determination result information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 is executed, etc.) ) Examples include gaming machines. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 12, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S904). Through the recovery process in step S904, a work area is set based on the storage contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), initialization processing (step S906) is executed, and then setting change processing (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process in step S905, a setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process in step S907, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the step The setting change process in S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 and the setting confirmation process in step S905 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 14 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 14(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 14(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this feature part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 15-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process enables determining the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. In addition, the performance control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice performance control pattern are not limited to those that set separate performance control patterns, but one performance control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each performance. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that there is an effect (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 15-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 15-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 15-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this way, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 15-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 15-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will continue to be made, as well as suggestions regarding the set values.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the performance mode by an arbitrary performance device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display It may be possible to make it possible to determine at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

FIG. 15-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display performance process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Further, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, and from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 15-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 15-6(A) shows an example HD 101 of performance execution in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is in a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 15-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD 102 in which the reach performance of normal reach progresses to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 15-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A performance display corresponding to the change performance is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 15-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 15-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 15-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 15-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect includes arbitrary effects such as a pseudo continuous effect and a look-ahead preview effect to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation, as well as setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary production, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify and improve gaming interest.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 059AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16-1 to 16-35. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 059AK of the present embodiment, the time saving control is performed not only after the jackpot game state but also when the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result (the time saving state is entered). As for the display result of the special figure game, although the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time-saving state, in the time-saving state, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, time-saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, regarding the decorative patterns, different patterns are stopped and displayed in the normal state and in the time saving state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 059AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 16-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and ordinary symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation. In addition, the "variable display" of the special design includes one in which multiple LEDs are turned on or flashed in sequence, and a predetermined lighting combination of LEDs may be displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory. In addition, in the time saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved. In the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed in which the game ball is fired into the gaming area on the right side for the player so as to win the game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and forms a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is turned into a big winning hole. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 16-1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Futou Suspension Display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of Futou Suspended Memory, which is the number of Futou games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowest part of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 16-1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 16-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the starting prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( Step S1201). If it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on (step S2101; Yes), for example, it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 turns the first special symbol on. It is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol which is the stored value of the first special symbol pending memory counter (counter that counts the first special symbol pending memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the first special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. If it is determined in step S1202 that the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control buffer setting section, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is the value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first starting port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or if it is determined in step S1202 that the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S1202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting hole switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes), for example, the second starting port switch 22B is determined to be on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 switches the second special symbol to It is determined whether the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 selects a second special symbol, which is a stored value of a second special symbol pending storage number counter (a counter that counts the number of second special symbol pending memories) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the second special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the second special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the second special symbol reservation memory number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103: The starting winning determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending memory number count value is added by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending memory number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending storage number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.), is updated to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of the starting prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, a random number for determining the special figure display result is selected from among numerical data updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). Numerical data indicating a numerical value MR1, a random numerical value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random numerical value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as pending data by being set at the head of an empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage section. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage section. In addition, at this time, when the reservation data is set in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the CPU 103 can control the first reservation display 25A to specify the number of first special symbol reservation memories added by one. The first hold display 25A may display the following information (for example, the number of LEDs lit may be increased by one). In addition, when the reservation data is set in the second special figure reservation storage section, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number that has been added by one. It is also possible to have the second hold indicator 25B do this (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (first special Stores pending data of a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the pattern display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the first starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are stored as pending data, and the number of stored data is stored. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the 1st special figure reservation storage part and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display section 5HL. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display section 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (second Stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the second starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are set as pending data, and the number is It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the 2nd special figure reservation storage part and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display section 5HR. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display section 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared starting opening winning designation command to the production control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a prize winning random number determination process (step S1213). As mentioned above, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is a process for determining the time of starting winning, and based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209, the random number value determination process is This is a process of determining whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small win" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 15-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer, initializes its stored value to "0", and then ( Step S1215), the starting prize winning determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From there (step S1216), the process advances to step S1204. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 16-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 16-2 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing is performed so that the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "big hit" or "small win" and a jackpot game is started. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random value determination process, the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), and the winning timing is extracted at this timing. The random number value (random number value extracted in the process of step S1209) is used to determine whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It determines which fluctuation pattern will occur (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts (before the start conditions for the special symbol game are established), the special symbol display result becomes a "jackpot" or It is predicted in advance that there will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be changed to a predetermined display mode, and based on the result of this pre-reading, the performance control CPU 120 etc. on the performance control board 12 side will suspend the display. Display mode etc. can be determined.

In the winning time random value determination process shown in FIG. ) and the state of the variable probability flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability variable state is present), the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S351). The CPU 103 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special pattern process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control flag control unit, etc.). Identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it is sufficient to specify that the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is a jackpot game state (step S352). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been hit (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is being executed in which the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is being performed in the variable probability state or the time saving state (step S353). ). If it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or if it is determined that the jackpot is hit in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the starting opening buffer value is "2". It is determined whether there is one (step S354). If it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs settings for restricting winning determination (step S356).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or if it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table, the special figure used to determine the special figure display result is determined according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. A diagram display result determination table is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). For example, the CPU 103 compares each determined value included in the jackpot determination range and the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 16-2, It may be determined whether there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start determination) can.

In addition, in the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. In addition, the CPU 103 stores the random number MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special map reservation storage section) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S1210, and makes the above judgment based on the held random number. You may do so. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage section.

If it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of jackpot types will be determined as the jackpot type by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-11), which will be described later, prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, and sets it as the table to be used (step S358). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value to be compared with the random value MR3.

If it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S305. , it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 16-11(B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a "small win", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value to be compared with the random value MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step S360; No). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range regarding the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time saving)" in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S355. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. In addition, the special symbol display result of "Loss (time saving)" refers to the variable display result in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time saving control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display, although it is "Loss". show.

If it is determined that it is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , select table data for time saving type determination from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of time-saving types is determined as the time-saving type by referring to the selected table data for determining the time-saving type.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 stores in advance a predetermined area of the ROM 101 to prepare a loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is turned on (see FIGS. 16-12 (A) and (D)), which will be described later. is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the variable display in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, although the variable display result is "loss", and each fluctuation pattern has a random value MR3. A decision value is assigned that is compared to the In step 059AKS002A, depending on the time saving type, either the table for determining the loss variation pattern when the time saving start flag is on in Figure 16-12 (A) or the loss fluctuation pattern determining table when the time saving start flag is on in Figure 16-12 (D) is selected. do it.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the time saving determination range (step 059 AKS001; No), the time saving start flag off failure fluctuation pattern determination table (Figure 16-12 ( B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any one of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is off, and select the determined value that matches the random value MR3. The assigned variation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern by, for example, comparing each determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern may be set, and the CPU 103 selects the random value MR3 and the minimum determined value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing the maximum value and the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes in steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a start-up winning command whose contents are in accordance with the determination results in steps S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364), and The numerical value judgment process ends. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure pending memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting opening buffer value is "1", the starting winning commands are the 1st starting opening winning designation command, the 1st special figure pending memory number specification command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the starting winning commands are the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure pending storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in command control processing.

The 1st special figure pending memory number designation command and the 2nd special figure pending memory number designation command to be sent are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending memory number and 2nd special figure pending memory number (the number of memory (command including the corresponding EXT data), and the specified special figure pending memory number may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending memory number counter and the second special figure pending memory number counter. The symbol designation command to be sent is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "jackpot" ("jackpot") when the determination result of step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes). If the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command (including the corresponding EXT data) that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "small hit" (" When the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is ``loss (time saving)''. When the specified command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "loss (time saving)") is determined, and the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is outside the time saving determination range (step S360; No), the judgment result of the variable display result is "loss". A command that specifies a certain thing (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "lose") is used, and when the determination result in step S354 is that the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a determination is made at the time of starting winning. The command may be a command that specifies "no determination" (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no determination"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be sent is a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is a command that specifies the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363. When the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") specifying that there is no judgment at the time of starting winning and "no judgment" is executed. do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small win". It is determined whether there will be a "win" or "loss (time saving)" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 16-10), and so-called pre-reading is performed. In addition, in this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but there is a certain degree of accuracy. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the winning time random number determination process, based on whether it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of step S352 or that the time saving control is being performed in the process of step S353, the start is started by the process of step S354. It is determined whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing steps such as step S355, and no determination is made at the time of starting winning. In this way, when the high opening control associated with the time saving control is performed or when the jackpot game state is in effect, each of the above-mentioned points is determined based on the occurrence of a starting prize (first starting winning) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening. Limit so that no judgment is made. As a result, when the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, when the time saving control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in progress, the first starting prize is The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the execution of prefetching based on .

FIG. 16-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step S1231). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second pending storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the reservation number "1" As data, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second pending memory count value by 1, the second special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the second special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. In the unit 151B, the pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step S1235). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined in step S1231 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if it could be determined.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" As data, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory count value by 1, the first special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the first special figure pending memory is updated. In the unit 151A, the pending data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes in steps S1234 and S1238, the variable display result is used as a table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "loss". A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-5(A) is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-5(B) is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", whether to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win", and whether to control the variable display result to a "loss (time saving)" and subsequent changes. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", whether to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win", and whether to control the variable display result to a "loss (time saving)" and subsequent changes. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time saving)", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random value for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR1 is assigned to the special figure display results of "Jackpot", "Lose (time saving)", and "Lose".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determined value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is based on the special figure display result as a "jackpot". This is decision data that is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state, or whether to treat the special figure display result as a "loss (time-saving)" and control from the next variable display to a time-saving state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), it is higher than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). A large number of determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game is played. If you control the state, the probability of a decision will increase. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the variable probability state, the jackpot is more likely to be achieved than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determining data is assigned to the result of determining whether to control to the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of determining whether to control to the gaming state is high. In addition, between the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table treats the special figure display result as a "loss (time saving)" and starts from the next variable display. Determination data is assigned so that the probability of determining that the time-saving state is controlled is increased. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the percentage of the special figure display result being "loss (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, no determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such settings, the variable display result is determined based on the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A; The special pattern display result can be determined based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. The ratio determined to be controlled to a small win game state as a "small win" can be varied.

In particular, in a special pattern game using the second special pattern, the special pattern display result is not determined to be a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state, so for example, the time saving state (low probability high base state) or In a game state where a game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, such as a high-accuracy, high-base state, the frequent occurrence of a small winning game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is prevented. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to a prolongation of the game. In addition, also in the second special figure display result determination table, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". . For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small win". In this way, when the state is in a high base state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state, the proportion of decisions to control to a small winning gaming state is lower than when it is in a low base state such as a normal state or a variable probability state with no time saving. good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 16-4, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is changed to "big hit", "small hit", "missing" ( Compare the special figure display results with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result of ``Save time)'' and ``Loss'' to determine whether the special figure display result is ``Jackpot'', ``Small hit'', ``Loss (time saver)'' or ``Loss''. (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the gaming state when the variable display such as the special figure game is started is a probability variable state. Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" using different determining data. For example, if the gaming state when a variable display such as a special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the time saving state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state when a variable display such as a special figure game is started, the gaming state is in the variable probability state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step S1241). If it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-6 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table is for determining the jackpot type to be one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state by setting the special figure display result as "jackpot". This is a table referenced by In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the second special symbol). Depending on whether the game is a special pattern game using the symbol display device 4B, the number (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be of multiple types such as "non-probable", "probable", or "suddenly". is assigned to the jackpot type.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determined value to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain" differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. In other words, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain", while the variable special figure When is the second special figure, no determined value is assigned to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain". With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Accordingly, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain" can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "suddenly certain" and the short-term opening jackpot state is not determined. In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decline in game interest due to a prolongation of the game. .

In addition, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determined value in a predetermined range that is different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the "suddenly certain" jackpot type. good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the "suddenly certain" jackpot type than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 16-4, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is changed to "non-probable variable", The jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of "probable change" and "suddenly certain" matches (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the thus determined jackpot type, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value in a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245). As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probable variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "sudden", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether the special symbol display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). When it is determined that it is a "small win" (step S1246; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "time saving"). It is determined whether there is one (Step 059AKS003). If it is determined that the time saving type is "time saving" (step 059 AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 uses the time saving type determination shown in FIG. Similar to the case where a table is selected and set and the jackpot type is determined, the time saving type is determined based on the random value MR2 (step 059AKS004).

The time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 is based on MR2, which is the same random number value for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "loss (time-saving)" and the time-saving state is controlled. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of time saving types. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol variablely displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the second special symbol) The numerical value (determined value) compared with the random number MR2 for determining the time saving type can be used to select multiple jackpot types such as "time saving A" to "time saving D" is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol that is variablely displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol, "time saving A" or "time saving B" is displayed. If the special symbol variablely displayed (fluctuated) in the special figure game is the second special symbol, the time-saving type is determined to be "time-saver C" or "time-saver D". "Time saving A" and "Time saving C" are time saving types that are controlled to be in a time saving state while the special symbol game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to be in a time saving state while the special symbol game is played 50 times. "Time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to be in a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving type buffer value, which is the value stored in the time-saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, corresponding to the time-saving type determined in step 059AKS004. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time-saving type is "Time-saving A", the time-saving type buffer value is set to "0", if "Time-saving B", it is set to "1", if "Time-saving C", it is set to "2", and "Time-saving D". ”, then “3” is sufficient.

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006). The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as a time-saving flag). If the time saving flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is to be started from the next special figure game.

If it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS003; No), or if it is determined that the time saving flag is on in step 059AKS006 (step 059AKS006; Yes), After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state or small winning gaming state, or whether to control to the time saving state next time, and furthermore, the jackpot A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the gaming state and the determination result of the time saving type in the case of the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special pattern display result is not a "loss (time saving)", the losing pattern is A special symbol showing a "-" symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special symbol display result is "lose (time-saving)", the time-saving symbol "1", " Any of the special symbols showing the numbers ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, in accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", a special symbol showing the number "4" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving C", a special symbol showing the number "6" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving D", a special symbol showing the number "8" is set as a confirmed special symbol.

If it is determined in step S1246 that the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the special pattern display result will be a "small win" corresponding to the pre-determined result that the special pattern display result will be a "small win". A special symbol showing the number 2 is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step S1241, the jackpot symbols "3", "5", and "7" are determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S1244. ” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", a special symbol showing the number "3" which is a normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in accordance with the determination result of setting the jackpot type as "probable variable", a special symbol showing the number "7", which is a probability variable jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols, is set as a fixed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", a special symbol showing the number "5", which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. . If the number of pending memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step S1250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 16-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the on state (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 16-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "Lose (time saving)" and "Lose", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "Non-reach" and "Reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lose" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), and the variable display pattern is called a "non-reach variation pattern". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "Lose (time saving)" or "Lose" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "Reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). . Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, there is a special variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) for loss (time saving), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", and a variable display There is a fluctuating pattern of time-saving fakes that incites the result to be a "lose" (time-saving), but which results in a "lose". For example, the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", and the dedicated variation pattern for losing (time saving) is selected only when the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", such as the variation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the type of super reach effect that is executed only when ``.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small win." The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss."

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 16-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is decided (predetermined) that the special figure display result will be a "jackpot". This table is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 16-11 (A), the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined depending on whether the jackpot type determination result is "non-probable variable", "probable variable", or "suddenly certain". The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Assigned to crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 16-11(A), the determined value is set for each fluctuation so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Some parts are assigned to patterns. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variable” or “probable variable”, the determined values for variable pattern PA4-1, variable pattern PB4-1, variable pattern PB4-2, and variable pattern PB4-3 are The assignments are different. As a result, the proportion of the same variation pattern can be varied depending on the result of determining which of a plurality of jackpot types to use.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there are parts where determined values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of a plurality of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation" or "probable variation", the determined value is assigned to variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, and variation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", a determined value is assigned to fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4 -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3 are not assigned determined values. As a result, when the special figure display result is "Jackpot" and the jackpot type is "Suddenly certain" and the short-term open jackpot state is controlled, a different fluctuation pattern is determined from the case where it is controlled to the normal open jackpot state. be able to.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable", "probable", or "sudden", depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a variable-probability state, or a time-saving state. Therefore, the determination value may be assigned differently to each variation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to vary the ratio determined to the same variation pattern depending on which of a plurality of types the gaming state is. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability", depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a variable probability state, or a time-saving state. In this way, determined values may be assigned to different variation patterns. Thereby, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on which of a plurality of types the gaming state is. In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". . Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot type will be ``probable variable'' than ``non-probable variable''. It can improve your interest. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16-11(A), the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B is better than the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of Super Reach C. , more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PB4-3 that performs the reach effect of super reach A than to the variation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the variation time becomes longer (see variation time in Figure 16-10). It is being

Returning to FIG. 16-8, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the off state in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is in the on state (step S263). ). If it is determined that the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). If it is determined that the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time saving start flag is on shown in FIGS. 16-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving start flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time saving start flag is OFF shown in FIGS. 16-12 (B) and (E) (step 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 performs the following depending on the type of the special figure, such as whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and whether or not the time is being reduced. A variation pattern corresponding to a loss in which the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" or "loss" is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, if the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether time saving control is being performed, the display shown in FIG. 12(A), and depending on the type of time saving, set the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation etc. Based on this, one of multiple types of variation patterns is determined. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, depending on whether time saving control is being performed, Figure 16-12 (C) or (D ), and determines one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. In addition, if the special figure display result is "lose" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, refer to the time-saving start flag off loss variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 16-12 (B), and the time-saving control is Depending on whether or not the time-saving state is being performed, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined based on numerical data indicating the random number MR3. In addition, if the special figure display result is "lose" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the time saving is in progress, the losing fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is off shown in Figure 16-12 (B) is displayed. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined. On the other hand, in the normal state, the change pattern is set to one of multiple types based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, etc. by referring to the time-saving start flag off loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 16-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature section 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the type of super reach is Determination values are assigned so that the time saving type is determined at different rates accordingly. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that when Super Reach, which has a high jackpot expectation, is executed, it becomes a time saving type that has a greater number of time savings (Super Reach B is more likely than "Time Saving A" than Super Reach C). (assigned so that the percentage of time-saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" (when the losing fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the decision value is set for Super Reach A, which has the highest jackpot expectation. Not assigned. That is, in the feature section 059AK, determination values are assigned so that the rate of "loss (time saving)" differs depending on the type of super reach. In addition, in the feature section 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of super reach B or super reach C is executed, when it becomes a jackpot, when it becomes a loss (time saving), Decision values are assigned so that there are a plurality of variable display results, such as when the game simply loses. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second starting winning hole is provided in the gaming area on the right side of the player, and the game ball will win only when the ball is hit to the right. ing. Therefore, in the characteristic part 059AK, the second special symbol changes in the time saving state due to the player hitting right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control ends and the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure will change in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special symbol changes only when the time saving control ends and the pending memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. Therefore, in the characteristic part 059AK, as shown in FIG. This is a variable display (fluctuation) fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to "4".

Returning to FIG. 16-8, after executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving start flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS011). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059 AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 displays PB2-4 indicating that the determined variation pattern is a confirmed variation pattern for time saving (that is, a variation pattern exclusively used for losing (time saving)). It is determined whether or not (Step 059AKS012). If the determined variation pattern is not PB2-4, a time-saving promotion period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion to be described later is added to the special figure variation time indicated by the determined variation pattern (step 059AKS013). . Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 16-9, a time-saving promotion period may be added according to the time-saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a special variation pattern for losing (time-saving), and PB2-5, which is a variation pattern for time-saving tricks, has a time-saving effect period (10 seconds) in the special figure variation time shown in Figure 16-10. )It is included. The time-saving promotion performance is a performance that stimulates whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 16-8, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the special symbol starts changing in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in Figure 16-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in correspondence with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time-saving excitement effect period has been added to the period. The CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time-saving promotion effect period is added). By this, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols are derived. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In addition, in the feature part 059AK of this embodiment, when the time-saving start flag is in the on state and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time-saving promotion effect period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion effect is set. , we have shown an example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period can be added. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, just like the time saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added, and the process may be the same as step 059AKS013. Specifically, the periods corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in Figure 16-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-determinable variable", "definite variable", and "sudden definite". do it.

Following the process of step S266, one of the special symbol games using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that one of the special symbol games for which the conditions are met is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display a display that can specify the first special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It is also possible to have the hold display 25A perform the process (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It may be possible to have the hold display 25B do this (for example, reduce the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 sends a command at the start of the variation of the special symbol (command at the start of variation) in order to notify the production control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc. Transmission settings are performed (step S268). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), display result specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command ( Sequentially send a command containing the first special figure pending memory number count value decremented by 1, that is, EXT data indicating the first special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game. Configure sending settings to On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 Sequentially transmits the reduced count value of the second special figure pending memory number (in other words, a command containing EXT data indicating the second special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure sending settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 16-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 16-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmed display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section, etc.) is on. (Step S291). Here, the special symbol confirmed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295, which will be described later, in response to the derived and displayed confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special symbol confirmed display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), settings are made for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S292). At this time, a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process for transmitting a decorative pattern stop command to the production control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also referred to as the pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and the derived and displayed decoration is This is a command that specifies the period (determined period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

Command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). Further, the variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first starting opening winning designation command) that specifies that a first starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. Command 8A02(H) is an effect control command (second starting opening winning designation command) that specifies that a second starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting slot winning designation command and the second starting slot winning designation command may be collectively referred to as the starting slot winning designation command.

Command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not it is a jackpot or a loss (time saving), as well as the jackpot type and time saving type, that is, the production control command (display result) that specifies variable display results. specified command). In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "Loss", "Loss (Loss)" for "Time Saving A" when the time saving type is "Time Saving A") ``01'' for ``time saving)'', ``05'' for ``jackpot'' with jackpot type of ``probable variable'', etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first fluctuation start designation command) that designates to start variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

Command 8FXX (H) is a production control command (design confirmation designation command) that specifies ending the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative design and deriving and displaying the display result (stop design), as well as the design finalization designation command. This is a command that specifies the period (determined period) for displaying decorative patterns. The feature section 059AK of this embodiment determines whether the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and the display result corresponding to each time saving type when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "Loss (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", the time saving type is set. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "Time saving A", "01", if the time saving type is "Time saving B", "02", If the type is "Time saving C", it is "03", if the time saving type is "Time saving D", it is "04", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (gaming state designation command) that designates a gaming state. In this embodiment, a gaming state designation command corresponding to each gaming state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low probability high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state (start of fanfare). Note that the fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state to notify that the jackpot gaming state has entered. Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game state.

Command A2XX(H) is a performance control command (big winning hole open designation command) that designates opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of rounds (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is a production control command (designated command after opening the big winning hole) that specifies closing of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of rounds (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state to notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Command A602 (H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win gaming state.

Command C1XX (H) is a production control command (first special figure pending memory number designation command) that specifies the first special figure pending memory number. "XX" indicates the number of stored first special symbols. Command C2XX (H) is a production control command (second special figure pending memory number designation command) that specifies the second special figure pending memory number. "XX" indicates the number of second special symbols reserved. The first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second special figure pending memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as the special figure pending memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is a performance control command (symbol determination result designation command) that designates the display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C5XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) that designates a fluctuation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, in the process of step S101 which will be described later, random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR3, before the variable display start condition is satisfied, the variable display is changed based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR3. It is determined whether the display result is a "jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random number value determination process (see FIG. 16-3) in step S1213. Note that in certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case of no judgment) regarding the display result, and that number is set to "XX" in the symbol designation command (for example, if there is "no judgment", " 00", "01" etc. are set if it is a "loss", a unique number is assigned according to the type of time saving if it is a "loss (time saving)", and a unique number is assigned according to the type of jackpot if it is a "jackpot". number will be assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result for the fluctuation pattern (including the case of no judgment), and that number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if there is no judgment, "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 16-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 16-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is a process that performs settings for transmitting a decorative pattern stop command according to the variable display result and the time saving type. In the decoration symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059 AKS042; Yes), the current variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", so the CPU 103 sets the sending of the decorative pattern stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decoration pattern stop command transmission setting process is ended.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 16-15(B), a predetermined decorative pattern stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "Time saver A" and "Time saver B", while the fixed time is 5 seconds for "Time saver C", and 2 seconds for "Time saver D". The time saving types of "Time saving A" and "Time saving B" are the time saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special map is "Loss (Time saving)", and "Time saving C" and "Time saving The time-saving type of ``D'' is a time-saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is ``Loss (time saver)'', so the variable display result of the 1st special figure is ``Loss (time saver)''. Since the confirmation time is different depending on whether the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "Loss (Time Saving)" or "Loss (Time Saving)", variations in the variable display can be increased and the game's interest can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "lose (time saving)", the fixed period differs depending on the time saving type, so the fixed period can attract the player's attention. In addition, in the feature section 059AK, since the process of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time saving state is not in effect, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol remaining after the time saver ends is Only in the case of "missing (time saving)", the process of step 059AKS043 is performed, so that the determined time is determined according to the time saving type of "time saving C" and "time saving D" shown in the figure. In other words, in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction (at most, after the end of the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special symbol four times), the time reduction state is again controlled. C" and "Time Saving D"), as shown in the figure, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special symbol is "Loss (Time Saving)" in the normal state ("Time Saving A" and "Time Saving B") The confirmation time is shorter than that of Therefore, by lengthening the confirmation period for the variable display of the normal state and the first special symbol, which requires clear notification to the player that the time-saving state will be controlled, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time-saving state will be controlled. It is possible to set a period for clearly informing players. In addition, if the time reduction state is to be controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease if the confirmation period is long. This prevents a decline in

If the time saving flag is in the on state at step 059AKS041 in FIG. makes settings to transmit command 8F00 (determination period 0.5 seconds) as a decorative pattern stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process.

Returning to FIG. 16-13, after executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 executes the confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0 .5 seconds) as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In addition, in the process of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting section 153. Then, after setting the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stopping process is ended. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmed display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure confirmed display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value was set in the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value has become "0" is determined. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the timer value is a value other than "0", the game control process timer value should be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt. Bye. If the special symbol confirmed display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is ended and the CPU waits until the special symbol confirmed display time has elapsed.

When the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special pattern confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), check whether the jackpot flag is on or not. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). In addition, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is stored in the transmission command buffer as the transmission command. It is only necessary to store it in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the variable probability state, time saving state, and remaining pending period, which will be described later (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the variable probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the remaining pending period flag to turn them off, or the number of time-saving times to count the remaining number of special symbol games to be executed in the time-saving state. It suffices if a process such as clearing a counter is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-process (step S303), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as a production waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Next, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in response to the special figure display result being a "small win" (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Moreover, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start process is executed (step 059AKS025). Details of the time saving start process will be described later. After executing the process in step 059AKS025, or if the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special map process flag and initializes its value to "0". (Step S309). After executing either of the processes in steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving number count value, which is the value stored in the time saving number counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether the updated time saving number count value matches a predetermined time saving end determination value (for example, "0", etc.). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the determination is No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs time saving end processing (step 059AKS028). Details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or if the time saving state is not ended in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a remaining reservation period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining pending period may be determined by checking whether a remaining pending period flag, which will be described later, is set to an on state. If it is the remaining pending period, that is, if the remaining pending period flag is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining pending period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop processing. . Details of the remaining reservation period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining pending period, that is, if the flag is off during the remaining pending period (step 059 AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing as it is.

FIG. 16-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 16-13 as the time saving start process. The time saving start process is a process in which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and settings are made for performing time saving control from the next variable display. In the time saving start process shown in FIG. 16-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051) and sets the time saving flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether the remaining pending period flag is on (step 059AKS053). The remaining pending period flag is a flag indicating that a variable display is in progress corresponding to the holding of the second special symbol remaining after the end of the time reduction (remaining pending), and is a flag indicating that the remaining pending period flag is being displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the holding (remaining pending) of the second special symbol that remains after the time reduction ends, and is a flag that is displayed in a variable manner in step 059AKS063 (see Figures 16-17), which will be described later. When the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol that is set to the on state in the process and remains after the end of the time reduction is finished (step 059AKS072 described later), When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the 2 special drawings becomes "loss (time saving)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

If it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 16-16 that the remaining pending period flag is in the off state (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball into the gaming area on the right side for the player. Settings are made to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start process is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS054 to the production control board 12 side, the right-handed instruction display in the form shown in FIG. 16-33(F) is displayed on the production control board 12 side. It will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 16-16 that the remaining pending period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining pending period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , clears various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, it is sufficient to clear the values of the remaining pending count value and the post-time saving variation count value, which will be described later, to the initial value "0". The post-time saving variable count value, like the remaining pending count value, may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the time saving state ends. Although illustration is omitted, the fluctuation count value after the end of the time saving is, for example, in the special symbol fluctuation processing in step S112 of FIG. It's fine if it gets +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 16-16, the CPU 103 makes settings to transmit the simple mode right-hand hitting instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start process. By transmitting the simple mode right-hitting instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS057 to the production control board 12 side, the right-handed striking instruction in the mode shown in FIG. 16-35 (O) is provided on the production control board 12 side. Display is performed. The simple format right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 16-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in step 059AKS054, and this is because This is due to the variable display result being a "loss (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction (at most after the end of the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special symbol four times), the time reduction state will be controlled again, so step 059AKS057 In the process of step 059AKS054, if the right-handed instruction command is transmitted, there is a risk that the player will be bothered. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-hand hit instruction is sent in a simple manner to prevent the player from being bothered and losing interest in the game. .

FIG. 16-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 16-13 as the time saving end process. The time-saving termination process is a process for terminating the time-saving control and setting the remaining reservation period. In addition, regarding the variable probability state where the time saving flag is on and the probability variable flag is also on, the time shortening control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "jackpot". Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the variable probability state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that it is to be ended. When ending the time reduction control in this way, the variable probability control may also be terminated to return to the normal state, and the variable probability control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or further. It may be continued until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the time saving end process shown in FIGS. 16-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a second special figure on hold (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, by checking the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, it may be determined whether or not there is a reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol.

If the second special figure is on hold (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to ON during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is on hold (remaining hold). A count value for the number of remaining reservations is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", the remaining reservation number count value is set to "4", and " If it is "3", set "3", if it is "2", set "2", and if "1", set "1".

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the post-time saving variation count value by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). Note that the post-time saving fluctuation count value is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 16-16, so if it is "0", the processing in step 059AKS065 can be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 makes a setting to transmit a right-handed hit erasing command for erasing the right-handed hit instruction display (step 059 AKS066), and ends the time saving end process. By transmitting the right hit erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the production control board 12 side, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 16-30 is executed on the production control board 12 side. , the right-handed hitting instruction display will be deleted.

If it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 16-17 that there is no hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball to the game area on the left side for the player. Settings are made to transmit a left-handed batting instruction command for instructing to return to so-called left-handed batting (step 059AKS067), and the time saving termination process is ended.

FIG. 16-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 16-13 as the remaining reservation period end determination process. The remaining reservation period end determination process determines whether the remaining reservation period has ended, that is, whether all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol remaining after the time reduction end have ended. This process ends the remaining hold period when the hold period ends. In the remaining reservation period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the after-time-saving change count value matches the remaining reservation number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 16-17 (step 059AKS071). . If the post-time saving variation count value does not match the remaining reservation number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 directly ends the remaining reservation period end determination process.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation count value after the end of time saving matches the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining hold period flag to the off state (step 059AKS072), and sets various count values. (Step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, similarly to the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining pending count value and the fluctuation count value after time reduction end may be cleared to the initial value "0". After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 makes settings to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to so-called left-handed batting in which the game ball is fired into the left-hand playing area (step 059AKS074). , ends the remaining reservation period end determination process. By transmitting the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059 AKS074 to the production control board 12 side, the production control board 12 side can perform left-handed production as shown in FIG. 16-34 (N-2). Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 16-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 16-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, when updating the value of the special figure process flag to "7" in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 shown in FIG. A determined timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1, and the game control process timer value after the update matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.). Depending on whether or not, it may be determined whether or not the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed. If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting section 155 is read out (step S322). , to specify whether the jackpot type was "non-probable", "probable" or "sudden". At this time, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variation" (step S323).

If it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" (step S323; Yes), settings are made to start control to change the gaming state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state, and sets the time-saving number counter to a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit of the special game that can be executed in the time-saving state. Set to . On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "suddenly certain" (step S323; No), settings are made to start control to change the gaming state to a variable probability state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the on state.

In addition, settings may be made to control to different types of probability variable states depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable" or when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain." As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving number count value is not set, and then the special figure display result is It is set so that both probability variable control and time saving control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is achieved. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain", both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time saving number count value is set as in the case where the time saving state is controlled. Settings are made, and probability variable control continues until the next special figure display result becomes a "jackpot", while time saving control continues until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). You can also set it as follows. Alternatively, if the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden certainty" and the predetermined time saving medium sudden certainty flag is on, settings are made to start the time saving control together with probability variable control, while the time saving medium sudden certainty flag is off. If so, settings may be made to start only variable probability control. Here, the time saving medium sudden certainty flag indicates that, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. 16-13, the jackpot type is "sudden certainty" and that the time saving flag is on. It may be set to the on state in response to the time saving control being performed.

After executing either of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is ended.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the feature section 059AK in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 16-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 receives the starting winning commands (starting winning hole designation command, special figure reservation memory number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether there is one (step S401).

If it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When receiving the 1st starting opening winning prize designation command or the 1st special figure pending memory number designation command as the starting winning command, the starting winning command (1st starting opening winning prize designation command, 1st special figure pending memory number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a 2nd starting opening winning prize designation command or a 2nd special figure pending storage number designation command is received as a starting winning command, the starting winning command (2nd starting opening winning prize designation command, 2nd special drawing pending storage number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second starting winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 16-21(A) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of first start winning. The first starting winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the starting winning receiving command received at the first starting winning. The first starting winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, in the first start winning command buffer in the feature section 059AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, there is an area where various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as the pending display number "0". (The same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When there is a starting prize in the 1st starting winning hole, four commands: 1st starting hole winning designation command, 1st special figure pending memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed in one. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 1st starting winning command buffer stores other information for each pending prize. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the storage information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first starting winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The data in the free area of the command buffer at the time of first start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a first starting opening winning prize designation command, a first special symbol reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

Further, FIG. 16-21(B) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. The second starting winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the starting winning receiving command received at the second starting winning. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, similar to the first starting winning command buffer, the second starting winning command buffer in the characteristic section 059AK in this embodiment has a pending display number "0" as a variable display during execution. An area is provided in which various types of corresponding command data are stored.

When there is a starting prize in the 2nd starting winning hole, four commands: 2nd starting hole winning designation command, 2nd special figure pending memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 2nd starting opening winning designation command, 2nd special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 2nd starting winning command buffer stores other information for each pending prize. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the stored information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the empty area of the second starting winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The data in the empty area of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each production control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a second starting opening winning prize designation command, a first special symbol reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the second starting winning command buffer, like the first starting winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers, and displays the display step change pattern described later. A storage area is provided for storing. The example shown in FIG. 15-8(B) shows an example in which no production control command data is stored in any of the storage areas of pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 16-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the production control CPU 120 , it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received gaming state designation command. (Step S404).

The high accuracy flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the probability change state, and is set in the high probability change flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. The high base flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is set in the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability high base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and the time saving flag are in the ON state), the performance control CPU 120 selects the high probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter, the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command specifies a high-accuracy, low-base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high-accuracy flag is turned on, and the high base is Turn the flag off. If the gaming state specification command specifies a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and time-saving flag are in the off state), both the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag are set. Turn off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the production control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and command analysis processing. end.

FIG. 16-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the reservation display setting process shown in FIG. 16-22, the production control CPU 120 first executes production control commands (starting opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, pending memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there has been reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not a starting opening winning designation command, a winning judgment result command, and a pending storage number notification command are newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By checking this, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the prefetch notice setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "Winning determination is restricted" is specified (step S1303). If the winning determination result is other than "Winning determination restricted" (step S1303; No), whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command is included in the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning; That is, it is determined whether the received starting opening winning command is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059 AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 selects a pending state in which the variable display result is "jackpot" or "loss (time saving)" in the stored pending state, or It is determined whether the variable display result is "lost" and a hold, which is a variable pattern of time-saving tricks, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by checking the contents of the first starting winning buffer shown in Figure 16-21(A), the variable display result is pending or variable display as "jackpot" or "loss (time saving)". It is only necessary to determine whether or not the result is a "loss" and a hold, which is a variation pattern of time-saving tricks, is stored.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "loss (time-saving)" hold, or the variable display result is a "lose" and there is no hold that is a time-saving fluctuating pattern is stored (step 059 AKS082; No ), the normal pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if either a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss (time-saving)" or a hold where the variable display result is a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first starting opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time saving state is in progress. The time-saving reservation change determination table for special drawing 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any one of steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the production control CPU 120 pre-reads according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute a pending display change effect as a preview effect and the manner of execution are determined (step S1304).

In the normal pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(A), the received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "jackpot" or This table is selected when a hold that is a "loss (time-saving)" or a variable display result is a "lose" and no hold that is a variation pattern of a time-saving fake is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal pending change determination table, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", when the variable display result is a "loss" and a variation pattern of super reach loss, or when the variable display result is a "small hit" , if it is a variable display result of "loss (time saving)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuating pattern of time saving crap, in other cases, correspondingly, if you execute it, you will be more likely to hit the jackpot than if you do not execute it. The determination ratios are assigned as shown in the figure, so that the expectation level is high and, when executed, the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of "red">"green">"blue". If the normal suspension change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 16-22, whether or not to execute the suspension display change effect and the manner of execution are determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal suspension change determination table. .

The limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23 (B) shows that the received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "jackpot" or This table is selected when either a hold that results in a "loss (time-saving)" or a hold that the variable display result is a "loss" and a change pattern of a time-saving fake is stored. In such a case, after the variable display executed first ends, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of the advance notice, the normal state changes to a time-saving state (which may become a variable probability state). Therefore, the variable display results and fluctuation patterns may differ between when reading ahead and when executing variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of the advance notice. Therefore, in the limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(B), execution of the pending display change performance in which the jackpot expectation level is equal to or higher than a certain value (in this example, "green" or higher) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect that is in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may also be possible to only not execute it. For example, if the variable display result in the stored hold is "Loss" and the hold is stored as a time-saving change pattern, the display format of the hold display subject to the notice is initially changed to "Blue". ", and after the end of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the fluctuation pattern of the relevant time-saving gag, the display format of the suspension subject to the notice (the suspension displayed in "blue") will be changed to a suspension display of "green" or higher mode. It may be changed. Furthermore, the active display may be changed to "green" or higher. When the limit time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 16-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the limit time hold change determination table. .

In addition, in the normal time hold change determination table shown in Figure 16-23 (A) and the limit time hold change determination table shown in Figure 16-23 (B), when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", etc. , we have shown an example that is similar to the case where it becomes a "jackpot", but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time-saving)", or when the variable display result is "loss" and the time-saving spurious change If it is a pattern, it may have a specific aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect is increased, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

The time-saving reservation change determination table for special drawing 2 shown in FIG. 16-23(C) is a table that is selected when the received starting opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command. As shown in the figure, the time saving change reservation table for special drawing 2 is different from the normal time reservation change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(A) and the limit time reservation change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(B). Differently, a determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is a "loss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "loss" and the variation pattern is a fake time-saving variation pattern. If the received starting opening winning command is a second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not restricted, the gaming state is in a time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time-saving symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, time-saving control is not performed anew, and furthermore, the time-saving state is controlled in the remaining pending state by the return effect described later. Since the performance is performed to suggest whether or not the time will be shortened, there is no need to perform a hold display change performance that foretells that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time-saving time reservation change determination table for special drawing 2, there are cases where the variable display result is a "loss (time-saving)" and the variable display result is a "loss", which is a fluctuation pattern of a time-saving fake. No determination percentage is assigned in the case. When the time-saving reservation change determination table for the special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. The presence or absence and execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 16-22, after executing the process in step S1304, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is restricted (step S1303; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the result of the determination in step S1304. Data that specifiably indicates is stored in the pending display data storage unit in association with the pending number corresponding to the new starting prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is restricted, data corresponding to "No execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the pending display at the time of starting winning is updated (step S1313), and then the pre-read notice setting process is ended. For example, when the first special figure pending storage number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, the first pending display in the first pending display section 5HR is increased by 1, Add a new first pending display. On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize opening, the second pending display in the second pending display section 5HL is increased by one. Add a new second pending display. The first hold display and second hold display added at this time may be the hold display determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 16-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced by checking whether the high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section) is set to the on state. good.

If the time is being shortened (Step 059AKS086; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number of time reductions to update the number of time reductions (Step 059AKS086A). Note that the number of time saving times is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 16-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or if it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not being shortened (step 059AKS086; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a left-handed batting instruction command has been received from the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS087), and if received (Step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed hitting instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 16-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to play left-handed (see M6 in FIG. 16-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). Note that the left-handed hitting instruction display may continue for 5 seconds each time, for example, from the time the left-handed hitting instruction command is received until the variable display is performed four times. . If the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or if the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the production control CPU 120 sends the right-handed instruction command or the simple mode right-handed instruction command to the main board 11 side. It is determined whether or not it has been received from (step 059AKS089).

If either of the right-handed instruction command and the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when a right-handed batting instruction command is received, a right-handed batting instruction display M3 is performed in the mode shown in FIG. A right-handed hitting instruction display M3 is performed as shown in 35(O). In addition, after the right hit instruction display is performed according to each command in step 059AKS090, other effects are displayed in the variable display each time until the time saving state ends, as shown in Figure 16-33 (G). It is only necessary that the right-handed hitting instruction display be performed in a manner that does not interfere with the player's performance.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or if it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simple mode right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the production control CPU 120 , it is determined whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are successfully received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are successfully received.

If either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally (step 059AKS090A; No), the production control CPU 120 executes a process at the time of failure (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 16-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 16-24 as the process at the time of failure. In the process at the time of failure shown in FIG. 16-25, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, that is, whether the missed command is a display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the missed event process. In this case, the decorative pattern will not be displayed variably, and the previous variable display result will remain the same until the pattern confirmation designation command is sent from the main board 11 side. , the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result designation command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern designation command is successfully received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, if the missed command is the display result designation command, the production control CPU 120 receives the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is determined whether or not it is a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving variation pattern, that is, a variation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). If it is a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving fake variation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the variation pattern includes a time saving effect period, a stop symbol setting process to be described later is performed (step 059AKS095), Ends the process when the data is missed. Note that in the characteristic section 059AK of this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command is successfully received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is a time-saving fixed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed to make it possible to execute a time-saving effect, but if either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. In this case, it may be possible to prohibit the performance of time-saving effects such as a time-saving promotion effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of failure.

On the other hand, if it is not a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving fake variation pattern (step 059 AKS094; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the combination of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the process at the time of failure is completed. In step 059AKS096, the combination having the lowest advantage for the player may be determined among the combinations of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. According to this, it is possible to prevent an inconsistency in which a combination of decorative symbols with a high advantage is stopped and displayed, but the result is actually a result with a low advantage, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, the production control board 12 cannot determine whether the variable display result is a "miss (time saving)" or not. Therefore, after executing the performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, the reach performance of Super Reach), the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform a performance control such that the variable display result is "loss (time saving)". In this case, until the symbol confirmation designation command is received, for example, a decorative symbol such as "???" may be displayed, or a predetermined losing symbol may be displayed shaking.

Returning to FIG. 16-24, if the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are successfully received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command ( It is determined whether the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss" based on the command stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S551). If it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss" (step S551; Yes), the production control CPU 120, for example, uses the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command (variable pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. Non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1, PA1 -2) (step S552).

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of determined ornamental symbols that will be the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination (step S553). ). For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. A determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of a non-reach combination) is determined by referring to a pre-stored decorative pattern determination table for a non-reach combination.

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 16-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 16-24. In the stop symbol setting process, execution settings for time-saving inciting effects and return effects are performed, and if the special symbol display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time-saving)", the time-saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to create a pattern is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbols that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbols are referred to as time-saving symbols to distinguish them from the time-saving symbols that are special symbols.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIG. 16-26, the performance control CPU 120 displays special symbols based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is a "loss (time-saving)" or a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" or "Loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving crap (step 059 AKS101; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not time saving is in progress. (Step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced by checking whether the high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section) is set to the on state. good. If the time is not being shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the losing symbol of the reach combination as a temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature section 059AK, if the special figure display result is a "loss (time-saving)" or a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then A time-saving provocation performance is carried out. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the super reach effect is determined as the losing symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative pattern of a reach combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for presentation, etc. is extracted, and the decoration of a reach combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is extracted. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving effect setting process for making settings for executing the time-saving effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 16-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of FIG. 16-26 as the time-saving effect setting process. In the time-saving effect setting process shown in FIG. As shown in 16-28, a time-saving effect effect pattern is determined (step 059 AKS113), and the time-saving effect setting process is ended. Although not shown in FIG. 16-28, when the time-saving effect setting process is executed as a result of the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missed-out process in FIG. 16-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. If it is other than the false variation pattern, since the time saving type is unknown, it is only necessary to decide on a time saving performance pattern that is a pattern only for failures (for example, a "success D" performance pattern with a performance time of 5 seconds, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 16-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving effect pattern of "success A" with a presentation time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving performance pattern of "success B" with a presentation time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving performance pattern of "success C" with a performance time of 1 second is determined. If it is a time-saving fluctuating pattern, the time-saving performance pattern of "failure" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. The presentation time corresponds to the time-saving presentation period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. 16-8 (see FIG. 16-9), and the presentation control CPU 120 uses the display results transmitted from the main board 11. Based on the specification command and the variation pattern specification command, the time corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance period is determined as the time-saving promotion performance time. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, since the production time is the same for the time-saving production pattern of "Success A" and the time-saving production pattern of "Failure", for example, the same character is displayed, and the time-saving pattern is displayed for "Success A". is a success pattern in which the symbols are finally stopped and displayed, and in the case of "failure", the time-saving symbols are not finally stopped and displayed, and the failure pattern is in which the decorative symbols of the reach combination are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game is successful (whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed). In addition, in the feature section 059AK, as shown in Figure 16-12, the rate at which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" differs depending on the type of reach effect executed, so regarding the time saving effect. Similarly, the execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, regarding the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, the variable display result will not be a "loss (time saving)" and the time saving effect will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving trick where the variable display result does not become "loss (time-saving)" even if the time-saving promotion effect is executed, there are cases where the jackpot expectation level such as super reach C is A low reach effect is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving promotion effect is executed differs depending on the type of ready-to-reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving promotion effect also differs.

Returning to FIG. 16-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS104, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS105). If the special symbol display result is "lose (time-saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines a decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time-saving symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process ends. In addition, in step 059AKS106, it is sufficient to determine a time-saving symbol in an aspect according to the time-saving type as the final stop symbol (see FIG. 16-32 (D-1) and FIG. 16-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special figure display result is neither a "loss (time-saving)" nor a "loss" and time-saving change pattern (step 059AKS101; No), the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the variation of the first (first) second special figure performed after the time saving ends (Step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time saving is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. Whether or not it is a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol may be determined based on whether or not a second symbol variation start designation command has been received.

If the variable display (fluctuation) corresponds to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059 AKS107; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the second special figure stored after the end of the time reduction. Executes a return effect setting process to execute a return effect that indicates whether or not a hold in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 16-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 16-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIG. 16-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is a hold in which the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure. This is determined by checking the contents of the production control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure among the production control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a hold whose special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure (step 059 AKS115; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 controls the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory where the special symbol display result is "lost (time-saving)", that is, the time-saving symbol will be stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), the return effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if there is no hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure where the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS115; No), the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A recovery failure pattern that informs that there is no hold in the hold memory where the special symbol display result is "lost (time-saving)", that is, the time-saving pattern will not be stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds. is set (step 059AKS117), and the return effect setting process is completed. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, both the return performance of the return success pattern and the return performance of the return failure pattern execute a common performance (performance that encourages whether or not the time will be shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is performed. The combination of decorative patterns used is different.

Returning to FIG. 16-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS108, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the return performance pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a successful return pattern (Step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative symbol of a reach combination including a time-saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (Step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is ended. The time-saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time-saving symbol determined in step 059AKS106 as the final stop symbol according to the time-saving type (see FIG. 16-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; No), if it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being reduced (step 059AKS102; Yes), or if the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)" in step 059AKS105. (Step 059AKS105; No), or if it is determined in Step 059AKS107 that the variable display does not correspond to the first (first) second special symbol change performed after the end of the time reduction (Step 059AKS107; No). ), the production control CPU 120 determines the combination of final decorative symbols that constitute the ready-to-go combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative pattern of a reach combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter, and stores it in the ROM 121 in advance and prepares it. The determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the ready-to-win combination) is determined by referring to the decorative pattern determination table for the ready-to-reach combination. In this way, in the stop symbol setting process, even if it is determined in step 059 AKS105 that the special symbol display result is a "loss (time saving)", if the time is being reduced (step 059 AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol becomes the decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination by the process of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 16-24, after executing the process of step 059AKS092, the production control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing performances during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative symbols, such as productions and mini-games (step S559), the production control pattern is selected from one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. (Step S560). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (performance control pattern during special figure fluctuation) in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is determined to perform a time-saving promotion performance or a return performance, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance or return performance is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received in the process at the time of failure in step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select the production control pattern. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed and the previous variable display result remains the same, but the main board 11 side waits until the pattern confirmation designation command is sent, and the pattern confirmation designation command is not received. At the same time, the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result designation command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the process at the time of a missed take, then in step S560, an effect control pattern exclusively for the missed take may be selected. .

Following the process of step S560, the performance control CPU 120 controls a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the performance control process timer provided in the performance control timer setting section (such as a performance control timer setting section) is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if execution of the time-saving effect is set in the time-saving effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 16-26, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command The initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the production time of the time-saving promotion production to the time. After executing step S561, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for starting variations in decorative patterns and the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the production control CPU 120, for example, sends a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special symbol variation production control pattern) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5 starts changing the decorative pattern by transmitting data to That's fine.

After executing the process of step S562, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. end.

FIG. 16-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. When the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 16-30 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S801). ). For example, the production control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and when an end code is read from the production control pattern in response to the updated production control process timer value. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time reduction number display period in which the number of time reductions is displayed (step 059 AKS121 ). The time saving number display period is a period for displaying the time saving number updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 16-24, and may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in step S560. If it is determined that it is the time saving number display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 controls the time saving number display control to display the number of time saving updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 16-24 as the remaining time saving number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or if it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time reduction number display period (step 059AKS121; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the ready-to-win production period for executing the ready-to-win production. (Step 059AKS123). The ready-to-win performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win performance period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win performance (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or if it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the ready-to-reach production period (step 059AKS123; No), the production control CPU 120 at the pattern temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop display the decorative pattern. It is determined whether there is one (Step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the ready-to-win combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 16-26 (step 059AKS103). If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the symbols (step 059AKS125; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays a temporary stop of the decorative symbols (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbols of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or if it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the time-saving stimulation performance period is in order to execute the time-saving stimulation performance. It is determined whether or not (Step 059AKS127). The time-saving promotion performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving promotion setting process of FIGS. 16-27. When it is determined that it is the time-saving promotion performance period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving promotion control for executing the time-saving promotion performance (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or if it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time-saving promotion performance period (step 059AKS126; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the return performance period for executing the return performance. (Step 059AKS129). The return performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return performance setting process of FIG. 16-29. When it is determined that it is the return performance period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs return performance control to execute the return performance (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return performance period (step 059AKS129; No), the performance control CPU 120, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. In addition, control is performed to execute effects during variable display, including effects that change the display mode of the active display, mini-games, etc., including variable display operations of decorative patterns (step S808), and effects processing during variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally (step 809; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the special symbol display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time saving)". (Step 059AKS137). If the special figure display result (variable display result) is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS137; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the variable display performance process.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "Loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS137; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time saving number to the time saving number (step 059AKS138), a special time reduction number notification control is performed to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time reductions (059AKS139), and then the variable display performance processing is ended. In addition, if the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the performance itself that notifies the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if the data is received normally, but if an inconsistency occurs, for example, the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, the time saving number will be notified as "?". A special time reduction number notification control may be performed to display "??times", or the performance itself for notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs decoration such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of symbols (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmed symbol display time according to the received symbol confirming command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the fixed time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 16-15 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS132). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is "Loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS132; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the time saving number specified by the received symbol confirmation command (Figure 16-15 (B ) is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control is performed to display the number of time reductions (notify the number of time reductions) (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or if it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS132; No), the production control CPU 120 It is determined whether an erase command has been received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it has been received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-hand hitting instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or if it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-hit erasing command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the production control CPU 120 waits for the value of the production process flag to be detected per special figure. It is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the process (step S812), and the variable display performance process is ended.

FIG. 16-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display in the case where the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. FIGS. 16-31 (A) to (C) all show examples where the variable display result is a "loss" (including a "loss (time saving)"). Specifically, FIG. 16-31(A) shows an example in which a time-saving symbol (with "time-saving A" as the time-saving type) is displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol. (B) shows an example where the time-saving effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol. An example of a fluctuating pattern is shown. In addition, in the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 16-31 (A) to (C) show examples in which super reach C is executed, and FIGS. 16-31 (A) and ( B) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 16-31(C) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in Figure 16-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, it becomes a reach state, and then the reach effect of super reach C is executed. Ru. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative symbol 757). Then, a short-time provocation performance is performed. The time-saving promotion performance period L4 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving promotion performance period L5 shown in FIG. 16-31(C) (see FIGS. 16-9 and 16-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the end of the time-saving promotion, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the 7:07 decorative symbol combination), and after the confirmed symbol display period L1 has elapsed, the fluctuation is stopped. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 16-15(B)).

As shown in Figure 16-31 (B), if the time-saving effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, it becomes a reach state. , After that, the reach effect of super reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmed symbol display period L2 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 16-15(A)), and is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 16-31(C).

As shown in FIG. 16-31(C), when the variable display is started in the case of the time-saving variable pattern, the ready-to-reach state is entered, and then the ready-to-reach effect of super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative symbol 757). Then, a short-time provocation performance is performed. The time-saving promotion performance period L5 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving promotion performance period L4 shown in FIG. 16-31(A) (see FIGS. 16-9 and 16-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the end of the time-saving promotion, the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmed symbol display period L3 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 16-15(A)), and is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 16-31(B).

Next, an example of the operation of the effect when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed or when the time-saving promotion effect is executed will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16-32 to 16-35.

As shown in Figure 16-32 (A), after the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, if the gaming state is in the normal state, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, Figure 16-32 (B-1) As shown, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern 5La is "7", the decorative pattern 5Ca is "5", and the decorative pattern 5Ra is An example is shown in which "7" is displayed as a temporary stop. In addition, as shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a manner that allows it to be visually recognized that it is a temporary stop while being swayed. Further, the display is not limited to the decorative patterns 5Ca in each "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, and all the decorative patterns may remain swaying. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in the time saving state, the determination in step 059AKS102 in FIG. 16-26 is negative, so the process in step 059AKS111 is performed without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols of the reach combination. , as shown in FIG. 16-32 (B-2), the lose symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, in the illustrated example, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result (the illustrated example shows an example of the special symbol display result of "1", which is the time-saving type of time-saving A), while the decorative symbol 3 shows an example in which the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-32 (B-2), after the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period.

When the time-saving promotion effect period starts from the state shown in FIG. 16-32 (B-1), the time-saving promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 16-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 "Maybe time-saving!?" is displayed to encourage whether or not the time-saving symbols should be stopped and displayed. Depending on whether or not the player wins, the time-saving symbols may be stopped and displayed or not.

When the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 16-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In Fig. 16-32 (D-1), the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in Fig. 16-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and "Time saving A" is displayed. This shows an example where the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1", which is the time-saving symbol of the time-saving type of "time-saving A". An example is shown in which a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving symbol 5Cb stops displaying. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the performance, or may change during the super reach performance. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving fluctuating pattern, in order to receive the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in Figure 16-15 (A), as shown in Figure 16-32 (D-2), the final stop symbol is Loss symbols of reach combinations are stopped and displayed. In addition, as a special figure display result, the special figure which shows the symbol of "-" which becomes a loss pattern as shown in figure is displayed as a special figure display result. Then, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period. In addition, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "blue" display mode before the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the promotion effect, or may change during the super reach effect. In addition, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the active display mode changes to, the time-saving symbol will be displayed as a stop display even if it is the same type of super reach reach effect. What is necessary is to change the display mode of the active display so that the ratio of active display differs. Note that the change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal time pending change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(A). In addition, unlike the normal time pending change determination table shown in Figure 16-23 (A), the variable display result is different between cases where the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and cases where the variable display result is a false change pattern of time saving. The display mode may be set to have a higher proportion of "green" or "red" when it is a "miss (time saving)".

In the state shown in FIG. 16-32 (D-1), by executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 16-30, the number of time reductions is displayed as time reduction number notification control, as shown in FIG. 16-33 (E). M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command 8F01 shown in FIG. 16-15(B) has been received as the symbol confirmation command, "100 time savings!" is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. In addition, when the process of step 059 AKS139 in FIG. 16-30 is executed, as special time reduction number notification control, "time reduction ??? times" is displayed and notification of the number of time reduction (number of time reduction) is limited. Bye. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, has elapsed, as shown in FIG. variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold displays HL3 and HL2 are shifted to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-33(F), the time saving number display M4 of "99 remaining time saving times" is displayed by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 16-30. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 16-24, a right-handed hitting instruction display M3 as shown in FIG. 16-33(F) is performed.

Thereafter, variable display will be performed multiple times in the time saving state. FIG. 16-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. In the time saving state, since it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening, a variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed and a hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 16-33 (G), the maximum number of four pending memories corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, and four pending displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Further, an example is shown in which a time reduction number display M4 of "19 time reductions remaining" is displayed. Note that the right-hitting instruction display in the form shown in Figure 16-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving symbol stops displaying, and from the second time onwards, ), it is displayed as a right-handed hitting instruction display M3 in a manner that does not interfere with other performances.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed ends, the time saving state ends. Figure 16-33 (H) is an example where decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting a non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. It shows. After the final stop symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra are stopped and displayed, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the final symbol display period specified by the 8F00 symbol confirmation command, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, in order to receive a right-handed erase command from the main board 11 side, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 16-30 is performed, and as shown in FIG. 16-33 (H), the right-handed The instruction display M3 will be erased. In addition, in this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure is stored, four, and four pending displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the variable corresponding to the pending display HR1 is displayed. The period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4 is the remaining pending period).

Subsequently, the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 16-33(I), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. Note that the illustrated example shows an example where the variable display result is a "loss" (an example is also shown where it is not a "loss (time saving)"). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result becomes "lose (time saver)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saver state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 16-5(A) and (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, during the remaining hold period, although it is in the normal state, the left-handed hitting instruction display will not be displayed as shown in the figure, and the player will be confused by the repeated display of right-handed hitting instruction display and left-handed hitting instruction display. This prevents this from happening. Note that the left-handed hitting instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining reservation period, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (N-2).

This variable display is the first variable display in the second special figure that was performed after the end of the time reduction, and since the execution setting for the return effect was made in the process of step 059AKS108 in Figure 16-26, the return effect is When the period comes, a return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 16-34 (J). In the return performance, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, it is determined whether or not a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4 which are remaining holds). It is only necessary to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a "loss (time saving)", that is, whether the time saving return symbol will be stopped and displayed. If it is a return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time-saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while if it is a return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time-saving return symbol is not stopped and displayed. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach may be stopped and displayed as the final stop. Further, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. Note that if the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "lost (time saving)", the determination is Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 16-26, so the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may also do so. In this case, the time-saving promotion effect may be executed after the return effect.

If a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is "lost (time saving)", that is, if it is a return success pattern, the process in step 059AKS110 in FIG. 16-26 will cause the display to change to FIG. As shown, a combination of decorative symbols including the time-saving return symbol 5Cc as the final stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and it is announced that there is a pending among the stored pending that the variable display result is "loss (time-saving)". be done. Note that this example shows a case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time saving)" (more specifically, the time saving type of "time saving D").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (L-1), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed while the remaining balance is on hold, so it is possible to give a sense of security to the player.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the pending display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the pending display HR4 is "loss (time saving)" (the time saving type is "time saving D"), so the symbol confirmation command is The symbol confirmation command 8F04 shown in Figure 16-15 (B) is received, and as shown in Figure 16-34 (M-1), the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type "Time-saving D" stops as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. Regarding the special figure display result, unlike in Figure 16-32 (D-1), a special symbol indicating the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special symbol display result. Ru. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 16-34 (M-1), by executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 16-30, as shown in FIG. The number of times display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command 8F04 shown in FIG. 16-15(B) has been received as the symbol confirmation command, "20 time savings!" is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, has elapsed, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in Figure 16-35 (O), the time saving state is controlled and the new A variable display (a variable display corresponding to the pending display HL3) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-35(O), the time saving number display M4 of "19 remaining time saving times" is displayed by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 16-30. Further, at step 059AKS090 in FIG. 16-24, as shown in FIG. 16-35(O), a right-handed hitting instruction display M3 is displayed in a simple mode that is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 16-33(F). be done.

On the other hand, if there is no storage in which the special figure display result is "lost (time saving)", that is, if it is a recovery failure pattern, then the process of step 059 AKS111 in FIG. ), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirming command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (L-2), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was a return performance of a return failure pattern, the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed, unlike in FIG. 16-34 (L-1).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the final symbols specified by the 8F00 symbol confirmation command are displayed. The fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the display period, and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining reservation period ends, a left-handed batting instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 16-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 16-24 causes the message "Please return to left-handed hitting!" to be displayed as shown in FIG. 16-34 (N-2). A left-handed batting instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-hand hit instruction display is performed in the variable display that is executed next after the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol remaining after the end of the time saving is completed.

FIG. 16-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing within the information output processing performed in the information output processing of step S23 in FIG. The processing in the information output processing shown in FIG. 16-36 includes processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. I do. When the processing in the information output processing shown in FIG. 16-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the regular figure display result as display signal output processing (step S1801). After executing the process in step S1801, the CPU 103 executes a drive signal output process (step S1802), and outputs a drive signal for the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes external information output processing (step S1803), and ends the processing within the information output processing. In step S1803, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is in progress or in a time-saving state (a special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended are output.

FIG. 16-37 is a timing chart showing the output timing of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 16-36. Specifically, FIG. 16-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. 16-37 (B) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the stop of the time-saving symbols. It shows the output timing of various signals in the case where the following occurs.

As shown in FIG. 16-37 (A), when the time saving state occurs due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of the jackpot symbol is output, and then (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). ), jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state is entered, so the jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the losing symbol has stopped is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the jackpot symbol has stopped is output again without the time saving state ending, the jackpot signal 1 is output, and the jackpot signal 3 is output. stops output. Note that since this is a jackpot during the time saving state, the jackpot signal 2 continues to be output as shown in the figure. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state is entered, so the jackpot signal 3 is output. After that, as time passes, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-savings ends, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. , output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 16-37 (B), when the time saving symbol is stopped and the time saving state is entered, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and then (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). ), jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, as time passes, a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the losing symbol has stopped is output, and if the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the jackpot symbol has stopped is output without the time saving state ending, the jackpot occurs at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. At the same time as the signal 1 is output, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state returns again, so the jackpot signal 3 will be output. In addition, as shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, as time passes, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-savings ends, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. , output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies and prevent confusion, and also to use external equipment to suitably save time and connect. It is possible to identify the state of affairs. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether the gaming state is in the time saving state, and the special figure display result If "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed, in the normal state, the next special map game (variable display) will be controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state), and the time saving state will be changed. When the game is in the current state, control regarding the gaming state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (no new time saving control is performed). In addition, when "Loss (time saving)" is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result, in the normal state, the production control CPU 120 sets the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol as the time saving symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 16-26. While the final stop symbols constituting the ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed, if the time is shortened, the final stop symbols constituting the ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 16-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-32 (B-2) and (D-1), a "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is displayed depending on whether the gaming state is normal or time saving. The special figure display result is a common display result (the special figure display result showing the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative pattern is different from the game state. When is in the normal state, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 16-26, while when the time-saving symbol is in the time-saving state, the reach The final stop symbols constituting the combination are stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 16-26, execution settings of a time-saving effect that incites whether or not a time-saving symbol indicating that the next variable display will be controlled to be in a time-saving state are stopped and displayed are performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving stimulation performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs the processing of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is the normal state, and does not perform the processing of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is the time saving state. Therefore, when in a time-saving state (special state), the time-saving promotion effect is not performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

Further, when "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 16-15, in the process of step 059AKS043, While transmitting the decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 16-15(B), if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS041, the decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted. In other words, when a "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed in the normal state and in the special state. The times (confirmed times) are different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state or not. When "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, the next special map game (variable display) will be controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state). , when in the time-saving state, control regarding the gaming state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time-saving)" is not performed (no new time-saving control is performed). And, as shown in FIG. 16-5, between the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table is better than the first special figure display result determination table. The decision data is assigned so that there is a high probability that the next variable display will be controlled to the time saving state. In addition, the production control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not a "loss (time saving)" pending is stored in the pending stored at the end of the time saving state through the process of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 16-26. It is possible to perform the performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can display a right-handed hitting instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 16-24, and until it receives the left-handed hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 16-18, that is, The left-handed hit instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, by receiving a left-handed instruction command in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 16-24. Then, the left hitting instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 16-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The performance control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 16-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends. . According to this, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hand hitting instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 16-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 16-24, a right hit instruction display is performed in a manner corresponding to the received command. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered and losing interest in the game.

In the return performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (remaining hold HR2 ~Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 will be a "loss (time-saving)"), that is, whether the time-saving return symbol will be stopped and displayed. The return performance includes a return performance for a successful return pattern and a return performance for a return failure pattern, and both have the same performance (for example, the purpose is to clear a predetermined mission to see whether or not the time will be shortened again). The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared as a result. According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to what happens after the common performance is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-7, when the variable display result of the remaining reservation is "loss (time saving)", the CPU 103 determines "time saving C" or "time saving D" as the time saving type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 in FIG. 16-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines a time-saving performance pattern for executing different patterns of time-saving performance according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 16-28. In other words, the time-saving provocation effect that is executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state is a "loss (time-saving)" and the variable display result corresponding to the second special symbol remaining on hold is a "loss (time-saving)". (time saving)'' is executed, and a different pattern of time-saving promotion performance is executed. According to this, different patterns of performances are executed depending on the situation, so that the game can be more interesting.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-hitting erasure command in the variable display of the time-saving end time through the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 16-17. Then, the performance control CPU 120 erases the right hit instruction display based on the command at the end of the variable display of the time saving end time by the process of step 059AKS136 of FIG. 16-30. Therefore, the right hit instruction display is erased during the remaining reservation period. Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hand hitting instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 16-16. Then, on the side of the production control CPU 120, in the first variable display to be controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 16-24, the relevant A right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a manner according to the received command. According to this, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, through the process of step S1803 in FIG. 16-36, the CPU 103 generates a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is in progress or in a time-saving state (a special prize is in progress), and a time-saving signal. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game is in progress and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended can be outputted to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. When the time-saving pattern is stopped and the time-saving state is entered, as shown in Figure 16-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time-saving symbol stop is output, and a jackpot signal is issued at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. is output. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive use state using the external device.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-37(B), at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing. Stop. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive use state using the external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) (when the losing fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the Super Reach A with the highest jackpot expectation is selected. No decision value is assigned, and decision values are assigned so that the percentage of "losses (time saving)" differs depending on the type of super reach executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hand hitting instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 16-16. Then, on the side of the production control CPU 120, in the first variable display to be controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 16-24, the relevant A right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a manner according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, there will be a jackpot, a loss (time saving), or a simple loss. Decision values are assigned so as to result in a plurality of variable display results. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern specification command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the production control CPU 120 performs production based on these commands. . For example, the production control CPU 120 determines that the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for performing a reach production of Super Reach B, and even if the determination is No in step S552 of FIG. 16-24, the display Based on the result designation command, whether or not to execute the processing in step 059AKS104 and step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the determination is Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIG. 16-26. That is, even when receiving a variation pattern command with a common performance content such as executing a super reach B or super reach C reach effect, different effects are executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 16-26, the execution setting of a time-saving effect (special effect) that incites whether or not the time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display is stopped or not is displayed. By performing this, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving excitement performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes the time-saving promotion performance after executing the common reach performance whether the time-saving promotion performance is executed or not. According to this, since a special performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-12, the rate at which the variable display result is "loss (time-saving)" differs depending on the type of reach effect that is executed, so the time-saving effect is similarly executed. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving trick where the variable display result does not become "loss (time-saving)" even if the time-saving promotion effect is executed, there are cases where the jackpot expectation level such as super reach C is A low reach effect is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving promotion effect is executed differs depending on the type of ready-to-reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving promotion effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display mode so that the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed differs even in the same type of super reach reach performance depending on which display mode the active display changes to. Change the display mode of active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern specification command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the production control CPU 120 performs production based on these commands. . For example, even if the content of the received display result specification command is different, if the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B, the production control CPU 120 controls the special figure display result (variable A common reach effect of super reach B is executed regardless of the display result). According to this, the performance can be suitably executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-7, the number of times the time saving state is controlled differs depending on the time saving type, and as shown in Figure 16-12, the number of times the time saving state is controlled is different depending on the time saving type. The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the pattern of the time-saving effect that is executed differs depending on the time-saving type. According to this, the number of subsequent time reductions differs depending on the performance executed, so it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 16-8, and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 16-15. The performance control CPU 120 performs performance execution settings based on the contents of the received display result designation command in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. Set the number of time saving specified by. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform production control.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 receives the display result specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command by checking the contents of the production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 16-24. Determine whether or not the data has been received normally, and if it cannot be received normally, execute the process for missing data shown in Figure 16-25, and if either the display result specification command or the fluctuation pattern specification command is missed. , Prohibits execution of time-saving effects such as time-saving promotion effects, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern when the item is missed. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the fluctuation pattern specification command cannot be received normally in the process of step 059AKS090A of FIG. If the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving fixed fluctuation pattern or a time-saving fake fluctuation pattern, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 of FIG. 16-25, a performance related to the time-saving state, such as a time-saving promotion performance, for example, is executed. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions based on the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 16-30. If the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, execution of the time saving number notification is performed by performing special time saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the time saving number notification in the process of step 059AKS139. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pending display change performance in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-22. Then, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result in the currently stored hold memory is a hold where the variable display result is a "jackpot", a hold where the result is a "loss (time saving)", a hold where the variable display result is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is a "time saving crap". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit hold change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the execution of the hold display change performance is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pending memory currently stored in step 059 AKS082, there are pendings where the variable display result is a "jackpot", pendings where the result is a "loss (time saving)", and pendings where the variable display result is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time saving crap". If the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit hold change determination table shown in Figure 16-23(B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when a hold whose display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the same holds true as in the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, as shown in FIG. -23(B) is selected to limit the execution of the hold display change effect by selecting the hold change determination table shown in (B). According to this, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

In addition, in the pending memory currently stored in step 059 AKS082, there are pendings where the variable display result is a "jackpot", pendings where the result is a "loss (time saving)", and pendings where the variable display result is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time saving crap". If the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit hold change determination table shown in Figure 16-23(B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "lost" and the variation pattern is stored as "time-saving crap", the execution of the pending display change performance is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a performance related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 16-23 (B), the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the pending display change performance when the pending display change performance is limited, or even if it is executed, the pending display change in the display mode of "blue" is executed. Execute the performance. In other words, a pending display change effect that indicates an expectation higher than the "green" display mode is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16-23 (B), the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the type of pending display change performance that changes the display mode to "green" or "red" when the pending display change performance is limited. . According to this, since the execution of a specific type of preview performance is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unnecessary anticipation.

(Modified example of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-5, an example was shown in which the time-saving symbols as a special symbol display result are part of the "loss", but this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 16-38, some of the small winning symbols may be made into time-saving symbols. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small winning game state, and a right hit instruction display may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small winning gaming state. In addition, as in the above embodiment, even if the small winning symbol, which is a time-saving symbol, is stopped and displayed again in the special figure game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not controlled anew, and the performance control CPU 120 Instead of the small winning symbols including the time-saving symbols, it is sufficient to simply display the combination of decorative symbols constituting the small winning.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are completed, a left-hitting instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 16-18, and the production control CPU 120 Although an example has been shown in which a left-handed hitting instruction display is performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to There may be a second mode that is not noticeable to the player, and the second mode of left-handed hitting instruction display may be performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining balance. Note that the left-handed batting instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed batting instruction command until the variable display is performed, for example, four times, but as time passes, the display changes from the second mode to You may change to a 1st aspect. Further, the left-handed hitting instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a left-handed hitting notification that notifies the player of left-handed hitting). For example, in the first mode, the sound notifying the left-handed player is output by erasing other output sounds, while in the second mode, the sound notifying the left-handed player is output without erasing the other output sounds. do it.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a return effect is performed when the variable display (fluctuation) corresponds to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction, but this is just an example. It is. The execution timing of the return performance is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time reduction. For example, if any of the reservations in the reservation memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol stored after the end of the time reduction is a "loss (time reduction)" ”, one of the timings of the first to third variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return performance. In addition, after executing the return performance of the return failure pattern, the pattern switches to the return success pattern, and after the execution of the return performance of the return failure pattern, the return performance of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display, etc. Multiple recovery regressions may be performed throughout the display until a successful pattern is reached.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time-saving effect that is executed depending on the time-saving type is different, that is, a case where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "loss (time-saving)" (time-saving C or D We have shown an example in which the pattern of the time-saving promotion effect differs depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure during the normal state is "loss (time-saving)" (time-saving types of time-saving A and B), This is an example.The case where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" and the case where the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is "Loss (Time saver)". , the pattern of time-saving promotion may be common.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "lost (time saving)" (time saving type C or D) and during the normal state, An example in which the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed (confirmation time) differs depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special drawing is a "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B) is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" (time saving type C or D), and the variable display result of the first special map during normal state is "Loss (time saving)" The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time saving type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress the control data from increasing.

For example, the confirmation time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" is the same as when the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is "Loss (time saving)". It can also be used as time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be entered.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" (Time saving type C or D), the variable display result of the first special map during the normal state is "Loss (Time saving)" Examples (Figure 16-35 (N-1), Figure 16-33 (E)) show an example of notifying the number of time reductions in a common manner at the fixed time in the case (time reduction type A and B). However, these may be in different embodiments.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, an example was shown in which the right-hand hitting instruction display is erased after the time-saving state ends, and the right-hand hitting instruction display is not performed during the remaining pending period, but this is just an example. The right-handed hitting instruction display is not limited to a mere display, and may include a sound, lighting of a lamp, etc. (In other words, it is sufficient if it is a right-handed hitting notification that notifies the right-handed hitting), and during the remaining reservation period, an image display For example, a right-handed lamp indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be turned on without displaying or outputting sound on the device 5.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-37(B), when the last variable display of the predetermined time saving number is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the symbol is confirmed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the output of the signal stops, an example has been shown in which the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing, but this is just an example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saver has a high rate of "loss (time saver)", even when the time saver ends, the remaining The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is finished. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive use state using the external device.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example has been shown in which the time-saving promotion performance is performed after the super-reach performance and it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbols will stop, but this is just an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of jackpot (including small win), time-saving symbol stop, and loss may be displayed. According to this, variations in the execution results of the ready-to-win performance can be increased, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", the time saving effect period is added to the variable pattern. A display result is provided, the same variation pattern as when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" can be selected, and a revival performance period to be executed after the reach performance is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a jackpot is configured after the revival performance. The symbols (special symbols and corresponding decorative symbols) may be stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, if the variable display result is "resurrection jackpot", it is only necessary to execute the process of adding the resurrection performance period after step S262 in FIG. 16-8, and it is possible to increase the variation of the performance with a simple process. can.

In the above embodiment, an example is performed in which a super reach reach effect is used to incite whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot, and then a time saving incitement effect is performed to incite whether or not time saving symbols will be stopped and displayed. However, in addition to this, for example, in a time-saving promotion, in addition to whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, there are also other advantages that go beyond time-saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. You may be notified of this. According to this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally in step S809 and step 059AKS137 of FIG. If it is a confirmed command, an example has been shown in which the notification of the number of time reductions is limited by performing special time reduction number notification control in which "??? times" is displayed as the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139. The background image may be changed according to the number of time reductions, so that the player can specify the number of time reductions to a certain extent even when special time reduction number notification control is performed. Specifically, the main board 11 side sends a background designation command according to the number of remaining time reductions, and the production control board 12 side displays the background image specified by the received background designation command. do it. According to this, the player can specify the number of time reductions to a certain extent based on the background image, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, each time the variable display is executed, a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the production control board 12 side transmits the remaining time reduction number designation command according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even if the special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time reductions, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. For example, if the number of time reductions is 100 times, a special fluctuation pattern may be sent from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing when 50 times remain. On the other hand, in response to receiving the special variation pattern, the user may notify the remaining 50 time saving times. According to this, even if the special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time reductions, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result in the pending memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. , and when a suspension of a variation pattern with a variation pattern of "time-saving trick" is stored, an example of selecting the limit-time suspension change determination table shown in FIG. 16-23(B) and executing a suspension display change effect, i.e. , if a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory or a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the hold shown in FIG. Although an example has been shown in which the common limit-time hold change determination table shown in 23(B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, this is just one example. There are differences between the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory and the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored. The execution of the hold display change performance may be restricted by selecting the limit hold change determination table. For example, on the one hand, a pre-read preview effect of the pending display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, a pre-read preview effect of the dialogue preview may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient to perform a type of performance with a low level of expectation. In addition, if a hold is stored in the currently stored hold memory where the variable display result is a "loss (time saving)", the hold display change effect will not be executed and the variable display result will be a "jackpot". If a hold is stored, whether or not to execute a hold change effect may be determined based on a hold change determination table that does not have a display mode of "green" or higher shown in FIG. 16-23(B).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the variable display result in the pending memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. If the suspension of the fluctuation pattern of "Loss" and the fluctuation pattern of "Time-saving crap" is stored, select the limit suspension change determination table shown in Figure 16-23 (B) and set the expectation level of "Green" or higher. Although an example is shown in which the pending display change effect is not executed, this is just an example. For example, in addition to the pending display change performance as a pre-reading notice performance, it is possible to execute multiple types of pre-reading notice performances such as dialogue notices and pre-reading zone notices, and if it is determined Yes at step 059AKS082 in Figure 16-22, the pre-reading It may also be possible not to perform a pre-read preview performance of the zone notice type. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being diverted from the reservation stored before the pre-read preview target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs, and the special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9", "-", etc. Although an example represented by a lighting pattern etc. has been shown, this is just one example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. Good too. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win", it is indicated by lighting up three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is a "loss (time saving)". ” and “loss” may be indicated by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 16-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 16-34 (M-1), the "time saving D" Although an example has been shown in which the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, this is just an example. For example, as shown in Figure 16-40, after the state shown in Figure 16-40 (L-1) (same as Figure 16-34 (L-1)), the time-saving return symbol 5Cc stops displaying. The time-saving return small symbol M5 that is made visible is displayed, and since it has already been announced that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the decorative symbol M5 is displayed as shown in Figure 16-40 (M-3). The variable display may be reduced and displayed (as a reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest in the game. In addition, since it has already been reported that the time-saving symbols will stop during the remaining pending period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining pending period. Restrictions may include not executing, executing in a manner with low expectations, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 059AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
If a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a "lost (time-saving)" special figure display result, etc.) is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, no control is performed based on the special display result (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS006, the process in step 059AKS006A is not executed),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect execution means can execute different effects between the normal state and the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS092). ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and in response to the variable display of the identification information, the production identification information is also displayed in a variable manner (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.). (e.g. variable display),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-32 (B-2) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) when the gaming state is normal state and when it is time saving state is the common display result ( (e.g., a special figure display result showing the number "1" which is a time-saving symbol of the time-saving type of "time-saving A"), the production identification information that is different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of decorative symbols, if the gaming state is the normal state, in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 16-26, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, while the time-saving symbol is When the state is, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 16-26),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When in the normal state, the performance execution means can execute a special performance that suggests that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may If it is determined to be Yes in step 059AKS102, the process in step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.), and in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS102, the process in step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is confirmed is different depending on whether the result is in the normal state or the special state (for example, when the result is in the normal state) If so, in the process of step 059AKS043, a decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. (e.g., sending a decorative pattern stop command to
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 060AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 060AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
If a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a "lost (time-saving)" special figure display result, etc.) is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, no control is performed based on the special display result (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS006, the process in step 059AKS006A is not executed),
As the variable display, first identification information and second identification information are variably displayed, and production identification information is variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. , the ratio of the special display result being displayed is higher in the variable display result of the second identification information than in the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special Compared to the figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table has a higher probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" and the next variable display will be controlled to a time saving state. , decision data is assigned, etc.),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information regarding the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, it is possible to execute different effects for effect control). The CPU 120 is capable of executing the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During the control in the special state, a notification is given to eject gaming media to a specific path in the gaming area (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090), and the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The information regarding the variable display includes information that makes the variable display result the special display result, and when the information that makes the special display result does not include the information, the information is stored at the end of the special state. Until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification to launch the game media to a normal route different from the specific route is not issued (for example, if the right Until the hitting instruction display is possible and the left hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. (e.g., not displaying left-handed batting instructions),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means is
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, notify that game media should be ejected to the normal route (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088, etc.);
game media to the normal route in the first variable display of the first identification information that is executed after the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state; (In the variable display that is performed after receiving the left-handed batting instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends, the left-handed batting instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect execution means stores information when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and at the end of the special state. In the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that game media should be launched to the specific route performed during control in the special state. The mode is different (for example, right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a mode according to the command received in step 059AKS090, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent players from being bothered and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect executing means is configured to perform the special display when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result. In the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, in the case where no resultant information is included, after the common effect is executed, a different effect is generated. (For example, there are return performances for a successful return pattern and return performances for a return failure pattern, and both perform a common performance (for example, a performance whose purpose is to clear a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not a certain mission is cleared).
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to what happens after the common performance is executed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means stores information when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and at the end of the special state. The effect when controlled to the special state is different depending on the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-28) (e.g., the pattern of the time-saving promotion effect that is executed depending on the time-saving type is different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of performances are executed depending on the situation, so that the game can be more interesting.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. In the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information regarding variable display, the display time of the special display result is the same (for example, the variable display result corresponding to remaining on hold is "losing (time saving)"). ” (time saving types such as time saving C and D) and cases where the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is “loss (time saving)” (time saving types such as time saving A and B). common time),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means is
During execution of the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, no notification to fire the game media to the specific route is made (for example, the process in step 059AKS136) ),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification is given that the game medium should be fired to the specific route (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS090, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
a first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
a second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
a third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3);
A fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result, the fourth signal output means outputs the fourth signal at the end of the variable display, and the third signal output means outputs the third signal. (For example, when the time-saving symbol is stopped due to a time-saving symbol stop, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time-saving symbol stop is output, as shown in FIG. 16-37 (B), and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. (e.g., a jackpot signal is output),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
a first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
a second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state,
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (time saving). Even if the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 will not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is output at the same time). (stopping at a certain timing, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 061AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 061AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time saving)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls the special display result. control from the normal state to the special state based on the above (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
The performance execution means is
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed in cases where the variable display result is the specific display result and a case where the variable display result is the special display result (for example, multiple types of reach effects can be executed),
The ratio of the special display results differs depending on which type of specific effects are executed among the plurality of types of specific effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-12, depending on the type of super reach, (e.g., the percentage of failures (time savings) differs),
While controlling to the special state, a notification is given that game media should be fired to a specific route in the gaming area, and the game media should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display that is executed after the special display result is displayed. Start notification (for example, display a right-hand hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a common specific display result in a case where the variable display result becomes the specific display result, a case where the variable display result becomes the special display result, and a case where the variable display result becomes a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. It is possible to execute multiple types of effects (for example, as shown in Figures 16-11 and 11-12, if the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, it will result in a jackpot or a loss (time saving). (e.g., the decision value is assigned to result in multiple variable display results, such as when the result is simply a loss),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, variations in performance results can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Variable display of identification information as the variable display, and variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of decorative patterns);
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. A common variable display pattern can be determined in each case (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
variably displaying the production identification information based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the processing of step S171 and step S172);
When the effect execution means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, if it is determined No in step S552) Even if 059AKS101 is determined as Yes, different effects will be executed depending on whether it is determined as No),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, variations in performance results can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that indicates whether or not the special display result will be obtained after performing the specific performance (for example, it is possible to execute a time-saving promotion performance after performing a reach performance of super reach). ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the special performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that suggests whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific performance, and whether or not the special performance is executed differs depending on the type of the specific performance (for example, (e.g., the rate at which time-saving promotions are executed varies depending on the type of reach production performed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that indicates whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and depending on the type of the specific effect, when the special effect is executed, the The proportion of special display results differs (for example, the proportion of time-saving incitement effects that are executed differs depending on the type of reach effect that is executed, and the rate that time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving incitement effect also differs. different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means is
It is further possible to perform a predetermined performance different from the specific performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the active display, etc.),
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the proportion of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the active display changes to, the same type of super Even if it is a reach effect, the rate at which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and executes an effect that notifies the specific display result after executing the special effect. Possible (for example, in a time-saving promotion, in addition to whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, it is also reported whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, which is more advantageous than time-saving). ,
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, expectations for a specific display result can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
Variable display of identification information as the variable display, and variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of decorative patterns);
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. A common variable display pattern can be determined in each case (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determining means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time in step 059AKS013). processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, the variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect execution means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance of Super Reach B even if the content indicated by the display result specification command is different.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, effects can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D", etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to have a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can be controlled to the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
The effect execution means is capable of executing different types of effects in the variable display resulting in the special display result depending on the type of the special display result (for example, the effect for the time saving type of "time saving B" is higher than the time saving type of "time saving A"). The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher in time-saving types, and the pattern of time-saving promotion effects that are executed depending on the time-saving type is different, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the number of subsequent time reductions differs depending on the performance executed, so it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D", etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to have a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can be controlled to the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of variable displays to be executed while controlling the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, (CPU 103, etc. that transmits a display result designation command in step S268 and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021),
The effect execution means determines the effect during the variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times the variable display is executed while the special state is controlled based on the received second command. (For example, in addition to executing an effect according to the contents of the display result specification command, in step 059AKS133, setting the number of time saving specified by the received symbol confirmation command, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control the performance.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The effect executing means executes an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and executes an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command, and selects one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command. If one cannot be received normally, restricting the execution of the performance related to the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (12) above,
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The performance execution means is
Executing an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the process of step S171),
If the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of special display results,
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to have a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can be controlled to the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of variable displays to be executed while controlling the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, (CPU 103, etc. that transmits a display result designation command in step S268 and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021),
The effect execution means determines the effect during the variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of times the variable display is executed while the special state is controlled based on the received second command. , if the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 059AKS139, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 062AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 062AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means is
If the judgment result information is newly received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the control is in the advantageous state, further restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received judgment result information ( For example, if a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined Yes in step 059 AKS082, etc.)
While the prefetch effect is limited, the prefetch effect can be executed in the same manner as the prefetch effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). processing, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance execution means is
If the judgment result information is newly received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to be controlled by the special state is to be executed, the newly received judgment result information further restricting the execution of the original pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing a time-saving effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082),
While the prefetch effect is limited, the prefetch effect can be executed in the same manner as the prefetch effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). processing, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a performance related to a state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means does not execute the prefetch effect in a manner that indicates that the advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a specific advantage while the prefetch effect is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23(B)). (e.g., do not execute a pending display change effect of "green" or higher as shown in ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means does not execute a specific type of prefetch effect while the prefetch effect is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23(B), when the pending display change effect is limited, "green" or (e.g., not executing the type of pending display change effect that changes the display mode to "red"),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of a specific type of preview performance is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without giving him unnecessary expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
The characteristic portion 063AK according to this embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top of the image display device 5, and a left game area 063AK1 on the right side of the top of the image display device 5. A right gaming area 063AK2 is provided. The left gaming area 063AK1 and the right gaming area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the gaming area 2, the nail arrangement PL, or the like. When the game ball (game medium) fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, it is guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example, to the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to 063AK2. In addition, when the game ball fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, the game ball is directed to the left game area 063AK1. and becomes impossible or difficult to guide.

The left gaming area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning hole 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning hole 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When game balls enter (enter) the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can win by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, three) are paid out, and the first starting condition, which is a condition for executing the first special drawing game, can be satisfied. . The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 17-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a big winning opening door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the big winning opening door (for special electric accessories). The grand prize opening door 063AK3 has a grand prize opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. ing. FIG. 17-2 shows a state in which the big winning opening door 063AK3 closes the big winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door 063AK3 closes the big winning hole 063AK4, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 063AK4. becomes impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the ON state, the big winning hole door 063AK3 opens the big winning hole 063AK4, and the game ball easily enters the big winning hole 063AK4. becomes. When game balls enter the big prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball wins in the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole or the general winning hole 10, for example.

The big winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 derives and displays (stops display) a jackpot symbol (specific display result) as a confirmed special symbol in a special symbol game, and the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". , when controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state), it is controlled to be in an open state in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 29 seconds) elapses and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 9 balls). , whichever is earlier. One cycle in which the big prize opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times).

In addition, in the big winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small winning pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special pattern game, and the display result of the variable display becomes a "small winning". , when controlled to the small winning game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined manner. Specifically, in the small winning game state, the open state and closed state of the large winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small winning game state, an open state for 0.1 seconds and a closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation in which the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 063AK4 are repeated is also referred to as opening and closing of the big winning opening. The opening/closing of the grand prize opening is repeated until the open state of 0.1 seconds is repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of openings (in this embodiment, 10 times), or the game balls are placed in the grand prize opening 063AK4 until the predetermined upper limit winning number (in this embodiment). In this case, the game ends when one of the conditions is met (up to 10 prizes).

The characteristic part 063AK allows the player to perform a gaming method (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitting") in which a game ball is launched into the left gaming area 063AK1 in a normal state (low probability low base state). A game method in which the game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in the time saving state (low probability high base state) while aiming to win the general winning hole 10 or the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Hereinafter, it is configured so that by making the ball hit the right hand (hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting"), the player can aim to win a prize into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state or the small win game state, by making the player hit the right ball, the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a jackpot 063AK4. It is designed to make you aim to win a prize.

A characteristic part 063AK performs a right-handed game promoting performance to encourage the player to play right-handed game during a period where the game is controlled to a time-saving state, a jackpot game state, and a small-win game state in which right-handed game is advantageous.

The game ball that has won in the big winning hole 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the big winning hole switch 063AK5, is detected by the big winning hole switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

In the jackpot game state, all the game balls that have won the big winning hole 063AK4 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18, which will be described later, through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the one game ball is The balls other than the balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

FIGS. 17-3(a) to 17-3(c) are diagrams showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 regarding the feature part 063AK, as seen from arrow II in FIG. 17-2. The case is shown below. As shown in FIG. 17-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between an on state and an off state with a substantially dogleg-shaped rotating piece 063AK10. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is provided. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to a plunger 063AK11, and rotates about a rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 between an on state and an off state.

As shown in FIG. 17-3(a), when the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the on state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a lower position (provided below) than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passed through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. be done. Thereby, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. Game ball A2, which passed through 063AK7 following game ball A1, is blocked by game ball A1 and cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8, so it advances to the right side. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. Note that the discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the rotating piece 063AK10 holds the game ball A1 and controls the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 from the on state to the off state, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution part as shown in FIG. 17-3(c). Solenoid 063AK12 pops out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and flips the game ball A1 toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 17-4(a), the game ball A3 that has flown down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, and then is sorted. Enter section 063AK18.

The distribution part 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game balls flowing down through the distribution part supply path 063AK8 to the jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and the time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) or the losing area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 are provided below the distribution section 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path are detected by a jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special drawing game, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the small winning game state is controlled, and the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through the jackpot area 063AK19. Based on this, the jackpot gaming state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time-saving region discharge path are detected by a time-saving region discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the game ball that won the big winning hole 063AK4 when the big winning hole 063AK4 was controlled to be in the open state, Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, time saving transition control is performed for a predetermined period of time after the end of the small winning game state to control the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. be exposed. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the game ball that won the big winning opening 063AK4 when the big winning opening 063AK4 was controlled to be in the open state. However, when the vehicle passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. In other words, if the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the time period is controlled to the time saving state by performing the time saving transition control. The structure is such that no control is performed to extend the period.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, after the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be closed and the small winning game state ends, when the next variable display starts, time-saving transition control based on the passing occurs. is performed, and the normal state is controlled to a time-saving state. That is, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the closed state. . According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, thereby changing the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. It is possible to suppress the possibility that inconsistency occurs between control and performance, confuses players, and reduces interest in gaming. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

The game ball that has entered the losing area 063AK21 passes through the losing area passing switch 063AK24, is detected by the losing area passing switch 063AK24, and then passes through the losing area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path are detected by a losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed and the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through the losing area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small winning game state, no control is performed to change the game state based on the passage.

Jackpot area light emitting parts 063AK25 are provided at the upper and lower ends of the jackpot area 063AK19. A time saving area light emitting section 063AK26 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the time saving area 063AK20. A losing area light emitting section 063AK27 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the losing area 063AK21. The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are equipped with light emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and configured to be able to emit light. . Although details will be described later, in the characteristic section 063AK, an effect is performed in which the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 emit light in a predetermined manner. FIG. 17-4(a) shows a state in which the jackpot area light emitting part 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting part 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting part 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution section 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

Specifically, the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a losing area entrance 063AK33, as shown in FIG. 17-4(b). The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the losing area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time-saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. The losing area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the losing area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the losing area entrance 063AK33 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the losing area entrance 063AK33. A passage opening 063AK34 through which game balls can pass is formed in the distribution member 063AK28. Below, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 17-4(b) will be set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is moved in the left-right direction between a position P6 as the left end position and a position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 17-4(b). move back and forth along the FIG. 17-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0, which is the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 17-5(a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area entrance port 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution portion 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 17-5(b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution part 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 17-5(c). It collides with the right side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the losing area entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution part 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the losing area entrance 063AK33 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to perform an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 17-6. Figure 17-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing an operation according to the distribution member movement pattern, and the time of the area through which the game ball passes. The changes over time are shown. Note that when the distribution member 063AK28 is not performing an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 17-4(b).

As shown in FIG. 17-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves rightward from position P0 at a constant speed. 17-4(b), passes through position P1 on the right side of position P0 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), passes through position P2 on the right side of position P1 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), and moves to FIG. The position P3 shown in b) is reached. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P3 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the center-right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right-end waiting time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward at a constant speed from position P3, passes through position P2, passes through position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 for the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward at a constant speed from position P0, passes through position P4 on the left side of position P0 shown in FIG. 17-4(b), and moves to FIG. It passes through position P5 on the left side of position P4 shown in FIG. 17-4(b) and reaches position P6 shown in FIG. 17-4(b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P6 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. Thereafter, the distribution member 063AK28 moves rightward at a constant speed from position P6, passes through position P5, passes through position P4, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the center position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left-center movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 moves back and forth in the left-right direction between the positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 operates according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 17-6, the game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 are However, it also changes which of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21 is passed through. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P2 and P3, the game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the jackpot area 063AK19. This is the period when the jackpot area passes. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P4 are defined as the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P4. It becomes a time saving area passing period in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P5 and P6, the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the loss area 063AK21. period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 are the periods when the distribution member 063AK28 enters the distribution section 063AK18. When the game ball is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertainty period in which it is not determined which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 it will enter.

In this embodiment, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special figure game and the small winning game state is controlled, a small winning start effect (small winning) that notifies that control to the small winning gaming state has started The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to perform a fanfare performance), and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small win start performance. As shown in Figure 17-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special pattern confirmation display time after the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game, and then the small winning starts. It ends when the performance time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 17-6, opening and closing of the big winning opening is started in response to the completion of the small winning start performance. As mentioned above, the opening/closing of the grand prize opening depends on whether the open state of 0.1 seconds is repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of openings, or the game ball enters the grand prize opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. The process ends when any of the conditions is met.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 17-6, in response to the completion of the small winning start performance and the start of opening and closing of the big prize opening, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is turned on. The rotating piece 063AK10 is in a state where it can hold the game balls that have entered the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the on state, and then controlled to be in the off state in response to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the game ball it is holding toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. However, the balls other than the one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the jackpot game state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to be in the on state. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, all the game balls that have won in the big winning hole 063AK4 in the jackpot gaming state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 17-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state at time t0 when the game ball holding time has elapsed after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, and the rotation The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 17-6, time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

In addition, the game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to open and close the big winning opening a predetermined upper limit number of times in the small winning gaming state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the grand prize opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 17-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 17-6) is determined by the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start performance time, and the game ball. The retention time is specified by .

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start performance time is It is set to one of multiple types of time depending on the type of small hit. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 is configured to differ depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win game state is controlled, the small win start performance time is set to a predetermined first specific time to third specific time shown in FIG. 17-7 according to the small win type. Set it to any time. As shown in FIG. 17-7, the second specific time (eg, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (eg, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (eg, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in Figure 17-7, when the small hit start performance time is set to the first specific time, the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed after the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. After the small win start performance is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in accordance with the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 17-7, since the time t1 is included in the losing area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and is therefore lost. Pass through area 063AK21. That is, when the small winning start performance time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the losing area 063AK21.

When the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start performance is started in response to the elapse of the special pattern confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. Thereafter, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small hit start performance is finished in accordance with the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 17-7, since time t2 is included in the time-saving area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t2 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, thereby reducing the time-saving area. Pass through area 063AK20. That is, when the small winning start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start performance is started in response to the elapse of the special pattern confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. Thereafter, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small hit start performance is completed in accordance with the passage of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 17-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution part 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and hits the jackpot. Pass through area 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19.

As mentioned above, depending on which of the first specific time to third specific time the small hit start performance time is set, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state will be placed in the jackpot area 063AK19. , the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 are different. In the feature section 063AK, by setting the small hit start performance time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on the small winning type, the game ball that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state. Then, among the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21, the area corresponding to the small winning type is passed through.

The characteristic part 063AK is based on the execution of a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small win fluctuation") in which small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game and the display result of the variable display is a "small winning". As shown in Figure 17-8(a), in addition to the above-mentioned right hit promotion performance and small hit start performance, as performances that respond to fluctuations in small hits, there are time-saving suggestion performances, passing promotion performances, and passage notifications. It is configured to be able to perform.

In this embodiment, as a right-handed driving promotion performance, a performance is performed in which a right-handed hitting promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed driving promotion performance is executed during the period when the time saving state and the jackpot gaming state are controlled, and as shown in FIG. 17-8(a), the performance is controlled to the small winning gaming state. Executed during the period.

Further, in this embodiment, as a small win start effect, a effect is executed in which a right arrow image and a small win start image are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The right arrow image is an effect image that has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and shows the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message “Put the ball here!” to encourage the player to put the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As mentioned above, the small hit start performance is started in response to the small winning symbol being derived and displayed in the special figure game and control to the small winning game state being started, and then the small winning start performance time elapses. Finish depending on what you did.

The time-saving suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the time-saving state is controlled, and is configured to be executable during execution of the small winning fluctuation. As described above, in the normal state, based on the fact that the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends. Ru. Correspondingly, in the feature section 063AK, in the normal state, when the small winning variation is executed, as an effect that suggests that the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game, It is configured such that the time-saving suggestion performance can be executed during execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is possible to perform various effects and improve the game interest. can.

As shown in Figure 17-8 (a), when the normal reach performance that is the reach performance of normal reach, the super reach performance that is the reach performance of super reach, and the time-saving suggestion performance are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time-saving suggestion performance is executed. The suggestion effect starts after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then in response to the small winning symbol being derived and displayed in the special pattern game and the small winning fluctuation ending. finish. Details of the time-saving suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17-9(a) and 17-9(b).

As shown in FIG. 17-9(a), when the time-saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 , a predetermined losing symbol (in this embodiment, "767") is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from that in which it is derived and displayed. Next, variable display of the decorative pattern is executed again in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and then in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. A time-saving suggestion symbol indicating that the time-saving state is controlled as shown in -9(b) is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time-saving suggestive pattern, a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a "chance" symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 17-9(a), after the time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is again variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is executed, and the time-saving suggestion performance ends in response to the small winning symbols being derived and displayed in the special figure game and the small winning variation being completed.

Returning to FIG. 17-8(a), the passing promotion effect suggests that the game ball that enters the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state will pass through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21. This is an effect that suggests passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. After the passing promotion effect is started in response to the completion of the small hit start effect and the opening/closing of the large winning hole, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state enters the jackpot area 063AK19 and saves time. The process ends when either the area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 is passed.

The passing notification performance is a performance that notifies which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 has been passed by the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state. In this embodiment, the passage notification performance is executed as a small win end performance (small win ending performance) that notifies that the control to the small win game state is ended. The passage notification performance is started in response to the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning game state, and then after a predetermined passage notification performance time End depending on what has passed.

In this embodiment, the passage notification performance time is set to a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning gaming state. It is set to any one of the 1st special time to the 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the passing notification performance time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, when the game ball is in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, so the passing notification performance time is The first special time is set in the same way as when passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passing notification performance time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passing notification performance time is set to a third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), the time-saving suggestion effect and passage stimulation are performed depending on the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the case where the small winning variation is executed in the time-saving state. The performance and the passing notification performance are configured to be executed or not or the performance mode is different.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), when a small hit variation is executed in a normal state, a time-saving suggestion performance can be executed while the small hit variation is being executed; When the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small winning variation. That is, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed. It is configured such that different effects can be executed while the small winning variation is being executed.

In the characteristic part 063AK, in the normal state, when a small winning variation is executed, by configuring the time-saving suggestion effect to be executable, the player is informed that based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured to create a sense of expectation that the time-saving transition control will be performed and to be controlled to a time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by configuring it so that the time saving suggestion effect is not executed when the small hit fluctuation is executed, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed. Even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on the passage of the time saving area 063AK20, The system is configured to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In this way, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed. By being configured to be able to perform different performances during the execution of small winning fluctuations, it is possible to perform suitable performances depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), when a small winning variation is executed in the normal state, after the small winning variation ends, the small winning gaming state is controlled and the opening and closing of the big winning opening is performed. At this time, a normal passing promotion performance (special performance) is performed as a passing promotion performance, which is a performance that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning opening is opened and closed after the small winning variation ends, the passing of the time saving area 063AK29 is performed as a passage stimulation effect. A time-saving passing promotion performance (specific performance) which is a performance that gives a suggestion regarding passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the losing area 063AK21 without making any suggestion is executed.

In this embodiment, the normal passing promotion effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a performance that On the other hand, in this embodiment, the time-saving time pass promotion effect is such that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It is a performance that suggests passing through.

In the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning fluctuation ends in the normal state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player The game ball is configured to create an expectation that the game ball will be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that it has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game Despite the fact that when the ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, no control is performed based on the passage, the player expects that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on the passing of the time saving area 063AK20. The structure is designed to prevent players from feeling anxious and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal passing promotion effect is executed. By being configured so that the time saving time passing promotion effect is executed when the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the time saving state. A suitable performance can be performed depending on the situation.

In this embodiment, as a normal passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-10(a), a normal passing promotion image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and a normal time pass promotion sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time saver? Is it a loss?" Perform the performance.

The normal passing promotion image AK1 shows the message "Jackpot" and the jackpot area passing promotion image AK2 suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the message "Time saving" shows the game ball passing through the time saving area. It includes a time-saving area passing promotion image AK3 suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK20, and a losing area passing promotion image AK4 indicating the message "Lose" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, based on the display mode of the normal pass promotion image AK1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state, it is expected that the small winning gaming state will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. Based on the degree (proportion) and the fact that the game ball passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the expectation level that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning gaming state and the game ball in the small winning gaming state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the failure area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the normal passing agitation image AK1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passage promotion image AK1, the jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 is based on the expectation that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state (the jackpot will be reached after the small winning gaming state ends). The time-saving area passage promotion image AK3 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation level (the degree of expectation controlled by the game state), and the time-saving area passage promotion image AK3 is displayed in accordance with the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small-hit game state (the end of the small-win game state). It is displayed in a display area according to the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning gaming state. will be displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (the first special figure is The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state at a higher rate than when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game used), and is controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends. . Correspondingly, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game and the small winning game state is controlled, the normal state is set in the normal state. While displaying the time passing inciting image AK1 in the display mode shown in FIG. In the time passing agitation effect, the normal time passing agitation image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 17-10(b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 17-10(b), the display area of the time-saving area passing bias image AK2 is larger than in the display mode shown in FIG. 17-10(a). In addition, the normal passing promotion effect shown in FIG. 17-10(b), which is executed when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the small winning game state is controlled, is the normal passing promotion image. Except that the display mode of AK1 is different, the normal time passage shown in FIG. 17-10(a) is executed when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game and the small winning game state is controlled. This is a performance similar to the inciting performance.

In this embodiment, as a time-saving time pass promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-10(c), a time-saving time pass promotion image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R then emit a time saving time passing inciting voice indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a loss?" Perform the output. The time-saving time passage promotion image AK5 includes a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 and a losing area passage promotion image AK4, but does not include the time-saving area passage promotion image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 17-8(b), in the normal state, when the game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball will hit the jackpot area as a passing notification effect. 063AK19, and after the end of the small win gaming state, a normal jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In this embodiment, as the normal jackpot area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a normal jackpot area passing notification image showing a message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passing notification effect, and the small winning game state After the end, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed to notify that the time-saving state is controlled. In the present embodiment, as a time-saving region passing notification effect, a time-saving region passing notification image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, which shows the message "Lucky!".

In the normal state, when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the small winning game state, the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small winning game state After the end of the game, a losing area passing notification effect is executed to notify that the control for changing the game state is not performed. In the present embodiment, as a losing area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a losing area passing notification image showing a message "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), when the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, as a passing notification effect. , A short-time jackpot area passing notification performance is executed, which is different from the normal jackpot area passing notification performance, which notifies that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small win gaming state ends. Ru. In this embodiment, as a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a time-saving jackpot area passing notification image showing a message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the passing notification effect is produced in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned losing area passing notification effect is executed.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the losing area 063AK21, a losing area passing notification performance is executed as a passing notification performance.

As shown in FIGS. 17-8(a) and 17-8(b), in the characteristic part 063AK, small winning symbols are derived and displayed as confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms After the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be open, when the big winning hole 063AK is controlled to be closed, the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , is configured to be able to perform different effects. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance that is performed when the grand prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the closed state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed to notify the player that the time-saving state will be activated after the small winning game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is possible to make the player aware that the player is being controlled by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , by executing the losing area passing notification effect, the game ball is informed to the player that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, even though the time saving transition control based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on this, it is possible to prevent the player from getting excited about being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game state, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic section 063AK, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. and when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. By being configured to be able to execute different effects, suitable control can be performed depending on the state when the small winning symbols are derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the time saving state, it also passes through both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured to be able to perform the same effect as when the player fails to pass the losing area. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 during the time saving state, the player cannot In addition, to prevent the player from having a sense of expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. I can do it.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 17-8(b), when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state, It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect that is different from the normal jackpot area passing notification effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player's attention to the performance performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in the time saving state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball enters the jackpot area. If the game ball passes through 063AK19, the small winning symbol will be derived and displayed in the first special game that is likely to be executed in the normal state, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open. Also, at a high rate, after the end of the small win game state, the game is controlled to be "Jackpot A" which is more advantageous for the player than "Jackpot B". With this configuration, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the player pays attention to which of the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect and the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed, and the game It can improve your interest.

FIG. 17-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the second pending storage count value stored in the second pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

In this embodiment, a second special figure reservation storage section is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special figure holding storage unit stores a special figure game (second special figure game) that has not yet been started, although a game ball has entered the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a second starting prize has occurred. Stores pending data of the special pattern game (using the second special pattern) on the pattern display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the second starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are set as pending data, and the number is It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

When the second special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 stores the number stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit in correspondence with the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read as pending data (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting and updating the second pending memory count value by 1, the second special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the second special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if it could be determined.

In this embodiment, a first special figure reservation storage section is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figure games that have not yet been started (first special figure Stores pending data of a special figure game (using the first special figure) on the display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the first starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are stored as pending data, and the number of stored data is stored. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 063AKS115, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory count value by 1, the first special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the first special figure pending memory is updated. The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either of the processes in steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit," "small hit," or "loss." The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the fluctuating special figure designation buffer value is selected and set as the table used for the purpose (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(a) is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(b) is set in the use table.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(a) is a table in which fixed special symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. The special figure display result is determined before the variable display result is determined as a "jackpot" and whether or not to control the jackpot game state, or whether or not the variable display result is treated as a "small win" and is controlled as a small win gaming state. This table is referred to in order to make a determination based on the random value MR1. The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(b) is a table in which fixed special symbols that are variable display results are derived and displayed in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special figure display result is determined before the variable display result is determined as a "jackpot" and whether or not to control the jackpot game state, or whether or not the variable display result is treated as a "small win" and is controlled as a small win gaming state. This table is referred to in order to make a determination based on the random value MR1.

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 17-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 17-12(b), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The numerical value (determined value) is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 17-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 17-12(b), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The table data indicating the decision value determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state, and whether to control the special figure display result as a "small win" and control it to a small win gaming state. This is decision data that is assigned to the decision result.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(b), more determination values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(a) are "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result. That is, between the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(b), the second special figure display result determination table is The determining data is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "small win" and the control is controlled to a small win gaming state is increased.

Returning to FIG. 17-11, following the process in step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 transfers the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation to the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing it with the determination value assigned to "jackpot" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be "jackpot" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS108). Thereafter, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17-13(b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 determines the jackpot type by performing a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063 AKS 109, and determines the jackpot type such that the special symbol that is variablely displayed in the special symbol game (“variable special symbol”) is the first Depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), "Jackpot A" shown in Figure 17-13 (a) or "Jackpot B" (step 063AKS110).

“Jackpot A” and “Jackpot B” shown in FIG. 17-13(a) are both “non-probable variable jackpots” that are not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to be "Jackpot A", the time saving state is controlled for a period after the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display is executed five times. When controlled to "Jackpot B", after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once. ``Jackpot A'', in which the time-saving state is controlled for a longer period after the end of the jackpot gaming state than ``Jackpot B'', is more advantageous for the player than ``Jackpot B''. In the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 17-13(b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot A" and not determined to be "jackpot B." With such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game, it is more likely to be received by the player than "jackpot B" at a higher rate than when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game. It is controlled to "Jackpot A" with a high advantage.

Returning to FIG. 17-11, after executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 generates a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "Jackpot B", it may be set to "1".

If it is determined in step 063AKS107 that the variable display result was not determined to be a "jackpot" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 selects the special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 with the determined value assigned to "small win" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is determined as a "small win". It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 063AKS120). Thereafter, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 17-14(b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 determines the type of small hit by performing a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121, and determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (variable special figure). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2", one of "Small hit A" to "Small hit E" shown in Figure 17-14 (a) is determined ( Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 17-14 (a), "small win A" and "small win B" are generated when the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state, is This is a small win type that passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the above-mentioned third specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning A" or "small winning B", the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the game ball that enters the jackpot 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state of "small winning A", after the small winning gaming state ends, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "jackpot A". . On the other hand, if the game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state of "Small winning B", after the small winning gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B" controlled by.

"Small win C" and "Small win D" are generated when the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small win game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, thereby entering the time saving area 063AK20. This is the type of small hit that passes. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D", the small win start performance time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning C" or "small winning D", the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. If the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state of "Small winning C", after the end of the small winning gaming state, the variable display will continue for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times. Controlled to shorten time. On the other hand, when the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state of "small winning D", the variable display is executed once after the small winning gaming state ends. It will be controlled to shorten the time for the period up to.

"Small win E" is a small win type in which the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small win gaming state, passes through the losing area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. be. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win E", the small win start performance time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning E", the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in Figure 17-14(b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is higher at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined as "small win A" which is controlled to "jackpot A" which is more advantageous for the player than "jackpot B". With such a configuration, if the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game and the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be open, the small winning pattern will be displayed in the first special pattern game. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game is played from "Jackpot B" after the small winning gaming state ends at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. It is controlled to "Jackpot A" which is highly advantageous for the player.

In the small hit type determination table shown in Figure 17-14(b), the sum of the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win A" and the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win B" The value corresponds to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small winning gaming state, based on the fact that the game ball passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state. In addition, the total value of the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win C" and the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win D" is the time saving area 063AK20 when the game ball is in the small win gaming state. This corresponds to the expectation that the time-saving state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends based on the fact that the small winning game state has passed. In addition, the rate at which the small win type is determined to be "small win E" is determined by the control that changes the game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the losing area 063AK21 in the small win game state. It does not meet expectations.

As shown in Figure 17-14(b), when the fluctuating special figure is the second special figure, the percentage (15%) where the small hit type is determined as “small hit C” and the small hit type is “ The percentage (15%) that is determined as "small hit D" and the total value (30%) is the percentage that is determined as "small hit C" when the variable special drawing is the first special drawing. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the percentage (15%) and the percentage (10%) where the small win type is determined to be "small win D". That is, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game, the small winning pattern is displayed at a higher rate in the small winning game state than when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game. It is configured such that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the determined special symbol of the second special symbol game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 17-11, after executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 executes the small win, which is the value stored in the small win type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, in response to the small win type determined in step 063AK122. By setting the type buffer value (step 063AKS123), the determined small winning type is stored. As an example, if the small win type is "Small win A", the small win type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "Small win B", it is set to "1", and if "Small win C", the small win type buffer value is set to "2". If it is a "small win D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small win E", it may be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, if it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the process in step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103, A fixed special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether to control the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state, etc. (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. If the first special symbol pending storage number is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 performs predetermined demonstration display settings (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIG. 17-15.

As shown in FIG. 17-15, in this embodiment, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "loss", and the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot". Variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" are set in advance.

In this embodiment, three types of super reach are set: super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 17-15. together with the variation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1, the variation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed, Variation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the super reach B reach effect is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the super reach A reach effect is executed. -3 and PB5-3 are included. In this embodiment, as a reach effect for super reach A, a character image representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect for super reach B, a character image representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, an effect is performed to display a character image representing character B, and as a reach effect for super reach C, an effect is performed to display a character image representing character C on the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include the variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is executed, Variation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 17-16 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as a variation pattern setting process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is in the on state (step 063AK201). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063 AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "jackpot" is determined (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 17-17, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PB3- in which the super reach C reach effect is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB3-1.The variable pattern PB3-2 is determined, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB3-2. The variation pattern PB3-3 is determined to be executed. With this configuration, the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the reach effect of super reach A is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed; The time is higher than when the super reach C reach effect is executed, and the time is higher when the super reach C reach effect is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 17-16, if it is determined in step 063AK201 that the jackpot flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small win flag is on (step 063AKS207). If it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. One of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "losing" is determined (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 17-18, in the loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PB2- in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. 1, and the reach effect of super reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variable pattern PB2-1.The variable pattern PB2-2 is determined, and the reach effect of super reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB2-2. is determined as the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17-16, if it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state. It is determined (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

If it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the normal state time saving fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17-19(a). , Depending on whether the small win type is "Small win A" to "Small win E", the variable pattern is displayed in response to the case where the variable display result is "Small win", and a time-saving suggestion effect is executed. One of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 is determined (step 063AKS210). Which of the small win types is "small win A" to "small win E" may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 17-19(b). By doing so, depending on which of the small winning type is "small winning A" to "small winning E", the variable display result is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small winning", and the time-saving suggestion effect is created. One of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that will not be executed is determined (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute the time-saving suggestion effect while the small hit variation is being executed, while when the small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state, the small hit variation The time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during execution.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 17-19(a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 17-19(b), the small hit type is the game ball. is a “small win A” or “small win B” that passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed. Variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 are determined in which the reach effect of super reach B is executed, and variation pattern PB4 is determined in which the reach effect of super reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, determined to be PB5-3. With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing the jackpot area) is higher when the reach effect of super reach A is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of super reach B is executed than when the reach effect of super reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the super reach effects from super reach A to super reach C will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 17-19(a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 17-19(b), the small hit type is the game ball. If it is a “small hit C” or “small hit D” that passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of super reach A is executed. Variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 are determined in which the reach effects of Super Reach B are executed, and variation patterns PB4 in which the reach effects of Super Reach C are executed at a higher rate than in the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1. With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is higher when the reach effect of super reach C is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of super reach B is executed than when the reach effect of super reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the super reach effects from super reach A to super reach C will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 17-16, after executing the processing of steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the special symbol starts changing in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. It is. By setting the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols are derived. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063 AKS203, the CPU 103 plays a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A and a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that one of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied is started (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display a display that can specify the first special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It is also possible to have the hold display 25A perform the process (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It may be possible to have the hold display 25B do this (for example, reduce the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 sends a command at the start of the variation of the special symbol (command at the start of variation) in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc. Transmission settings are made (step 063AKS205). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( (Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), Display result specification command (Command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command (A command including EXT data indicating the first special figure pending memory number count value decremented by 1, that is, the number of first special figure pending memories when one pending memory is consumed by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure the sending settings for sending. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( (Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), Display result specification command (Command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command (Command that includes EXT data indicating the second special figure pending memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the second special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is consumed by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure the sending settings for sending. In this embodiment, in the display result specification command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "loss", "big hit", or "small hit" , Result of determining which of multiple jackpot types to use when the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), Multiple types of small win types when the variable display result is a "small win" Different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (small hit type determination result).

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 17-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmed display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the special symbol confirmed display flag is set to an on state by the process of step 063AKS305, which will be described later, in response to the derived and displayed confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special symbol confirmed display flag is off (step 063 AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes settings for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063 AKS302), and sends a decorative symbol stop command to the production control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step 063AKS303). The decorative pattern stop command is also referred to as a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmed display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special figure confirmed display time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmed display time. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmed display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the special figure confirmed display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmed display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmed display time timer value is updated depending on whether the updated special figure confirmed display time timer value is "0" or not. It is only necessary to determine whether the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special symbol stop process is ended and the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed.

When the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special pattern confirmation display flag to turn it off (step 063AKS307), and then checks whether the jackpot flag is on or not. It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start performance waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start performance time during which the jackpot start performance (jackpot fanfare performance) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a winning start designation command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the normal state (a performance control command that designates the current game state in Pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 converts the opening number count value, which is the stored value of the opening number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (in this embodiment, 15 times) in the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, it is set to "15" (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time saving counter (063AKS315). The time saving number counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time saving times, which is the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to be in a time saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, by clearing the time saving number counter, the time saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time saving number counter, is set to "0" as an initial value. Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-process (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the jackpot flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

In step 063AKS317, if it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start performance waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start performance waiting time corresponds to the small win start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 determines the small hit start performance waiting time by referring to the small hit start performance waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 17-21. The small hit E is determined to be one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on which one of the small win A winning start performance waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small winning start performance waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 17-21, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time. Then, the small winning start performance waiting time is also determined to be the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small win C" or "small win D", corresponding to the small hit start performance time being set to the second specific time, the small win start performance waiting time is also set to the second specific time. Time will decide. When the small win type is "small win E", the small win start performance waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time in response to the small win start performance time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a winning start designation command (small winning fanfare command) according to the small winning from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS320) .

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small win flag to turn it off (step 063AKS322), and sets the opening number count value to correspond to the upper limit number of openings (10 times in this embodiment) for opening and closing the big winning opening in the small winning gaming state. (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). If it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

If it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time saving number count value by subtracting 1 (step 063 AKS326), and the updated time saving number count value is "0". It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time saving number count value is not "0" (step 063 AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

If it is determined that the time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state. Settings are made to do so (step 063AKS329), and the special symbol stop processing is completed.

FIG. 17-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S118 of the special symbol process process as a small hit pre-release process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the small win release preprocessing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small win start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start performance waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit starts depending on whether the updated small hit start performance waiting time timer value is "0" or not. It is determined whether the performance waiting time has elapsed. If it is determined that the small hit start performance waiting time has not elapsed (Step 063 AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening preprocessing.

In step 063AKS401, when it is determined that the small winning start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (Step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets a game ball holding time timer value, which is a stored value of a game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to a predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "9", which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 17-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the small hit opening process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the small winning opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening number count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). If it is determined that the number of openings count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit in the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether the number of prizes won (in this embodiment, 10) or more is greater than or equal to the number of prizes won (Step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls detected by the big winning port switch 063AK5 (the number of times game balls are detected by the big winning port switch 063AK5) is greater than or equal to the upper limit winning number.

In step 063AKS502, if it is determined that the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 is less than the upper limit winning number (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to open the big winning hole 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the timing to open the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the opening state of the big winning opening 063AK4 by controlling the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to the ON state. (Step 063 AKS504), and settings are made to send a command for specifying when the big prize opening is open (Step 063 AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the open count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the timing to open the big winning hole 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to close the big winning hole 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the timing to close the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. When it is determined that it is time to close the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening 063AK4 to be closed by controlling the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to the OFF state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting the command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the number of openings count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (Step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0" or not. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process.

In step 063AKS510, when it is determined that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the OFF state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 selects whether or not the jackpot area passage flag, time saving area passage flag, or loss area passage flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on in the small hit game state. It is determined whether the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21.

If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (jackpot area It is determined whether the passage switch 063AK22 has detected a game ball (step 063AKS518). If it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the small winning opening process.

In step 063AKS518, if it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects a game ball). (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS522) and ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the losing area passing switch 063AK24 has been turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 has detected a game ball). (step 063AKS523). If it is determined that the loss area passage switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 The area passing flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS524), and the small winning opening process is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Sometimes, the losing area passing flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the game ball has entered the jackpot slot 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether all the game balls have been ejected to the outside of the special variable prize winning ball device 7 (Step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 calculates the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times game balls were detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls were detected by the time saving area discharge count switch), and the losing area discharge count switch Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times game balls were detected by the losing area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether all the game balls that won in the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, if it is determined that all the game balls that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 adjusts the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to terminate the corresponding operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a winning end designation command (small winning ending command) according to the small winning from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sends a winning end designation command corresponding to the small winning to determine whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state or time saving state after the small winning gaming state ends, and to enter the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. A performance control command indicating the type of jackpot when controlled and the number of variable displays controlled to the time saving state when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 determines the states of the jackpot area passing flag, time saving area passing flag, and loss area passing flag, and the small winning type by referring to the winning end specification command determination table shown in FIG. Accordingly, any one of the small win end designation command 1 to the small win end designation command 5 is selected as the win end designation command according to the small win, and settings are made for transmitting the selected command.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-24, if the jackpot area passage flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win A", after the small win game state ends, the "jackpot A" The small win end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of `` is selected. If the jackpot area passage flag is set to the on state and the small win type is "small win B", the small win indicates that the jackpot game state will be controlled to "jackpot B" after the small win game state ends. End designation command 2 is selected. If the time saving area pass flag is set to ON state and the small win type is "Small win C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning game state ends. The small winning end designation command 3 indicating that the small winning is to be executed is selected. If the time-saving area pass flag is set to ON state and the small win type is "Small win D", the time-saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends. A small winning end designation command 4 indicating that the small winning is to be executed is transmitted. When the losing area passing flag is set to the ON state, regardless of the type of small win, after the small win gaming state ends, the small winning end designation command 5 is sent indicating that the control to change the gaming state is not performed. be done.

Returning to FIG. 17-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to any one of the above-mentioned first special time to third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification performance waiting time corresponds to the passage notification performance time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the states of the jackpot area passing flag, time saving area passing flag, and losing area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 17-25. Accordingly, one of the first to third special times is determined, and the passing notification performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 17-25, in this embodiment, when the jackpot area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passage flag is set to the ON state. When the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the losing area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. Ru.

Returning to FIG. 17-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "10", which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. Finish intermediate processing.

FIG. 17-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the small hit end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passing notification performance waiting time has elapsed (Step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passing notification performance waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the updated passing notification performance waiting time timer value is "0" or not, the CPU 103 waits for the passing notification performance. Determine whether time has elapsed. If it is determined that the passing notification performance waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). If it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063 AKS604, if the small win type is "small win A" which is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "jackpot A" after the small win gaming state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "jackpot A". On the other hand, if the small win type is "Small win B" which is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B" after the end of the small win gaming state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "Jackpot B". ” is set to “1”. The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS605), and sends a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Settings are made to do so (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time saving number counter (063AKS610). Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit ending process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passage flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving area passage flag is on (step 063AKS612). If it is determined that the time-saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small win type is "small win C" which is controlled to be in the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small win gaming state, the time saving number count value is set to "5", and if the small win type is "Small win D", which is controlled in the time saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the small win game state, the time saving number is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating a time saving state from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

If it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then executes the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small winning ending process is started in response to the completion of the small winning opening process in which the big winning opening is opened, and when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612 ;Yes), the time-saving flag is set to the on state in the small hit end process (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving state is not controlled until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, the characteristic part 063AK executes each process described above as a process in the special symbol process process of step S25, and as the information output process of step S23, the characteristic part 059AK Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature section 063AK, like the feature section 059AK, outputs the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress or the time is being shortened (in the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time saving state, a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time saving state is output to external equipment such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, and in the normal state, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state enters the time saving area 063AK4. In both the case where the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small winning game state based on the passing, the time saving state and the consecutive game state can be suitably specified in the external device.

FIG. 17-27 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as a variable display start setting process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is being controlled. If it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS701; Yes), the production control CPU 120 stores the sub side time saving number count value which is the stored value of the sub side time saving number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time saving number counter counts the number of time saving times (the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to be in the time saving state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for executing a time reduction number notification performance that notifies the number of time reductions (step 063AKS703). The present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying, on the screen of the image display device 5, a time reduction number notification image indicating the number of time reductions as the time reduction number notification effect. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode showing the current number of time reductions based on the sub-side time reduction number count value. In this embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is being executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the right-handed driving promotion performance flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). If it is determined that the right-handed hitting promotion performance flag is not on (step 063 AKS704; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the right-handed hitting promotion performance flag to the on state (step 063 AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed hitting promotion performance. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063 AKS706, the performance control CPU 120 sets the settings for executing the time-saving entry performance that notifies that the control to the time-saving state has started (the control has been changed from the normal state to the time-saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as a time-saving rush effect, a first time-saving rush image showing the message "Save time!" and a message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. An effect that displays the second time-saving entry image is executed. The second time saving entry image is an effect image that urges the player to win a game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B. In this embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the variable display is executed for the first time after being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, or if it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed hitting promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" based on the display result designation command etc. transmitted from the main board 11 (Step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step 063 AKS708; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays a decoration that becomes a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that becomes a fixed ornament symbol that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. A combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the performance control CPU 120 selects the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination as a confirmed decorative pattern by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative pattern determination table of the jackpot combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. decide.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. It is determined whether the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols that will be a losing combination as a confirmed decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the performance control CPU 120 selects the decorative pattern of the losing combination as a confirmed decorative pattern by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative pattern determination table of the losing combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. decide.

In step 063 AKS710, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step 063 AKS710; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS712) .

If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063 AKS712; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit confirmed decorative pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 17-28(b). By performing a random number lottery using the small win type, a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that becomes a small win combination is determined depending on which of the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E". Determine any one of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in -28(a) (step 063AKS713). Which of the small winning types is "small winning A" to "small winning E" may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063 AKS712; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines the small hit confirmed decorative symbol for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 17-28(c). By performing a random number lottery using a table, depending on which of the small winning types is "small winning A" to "small winning E", as a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that becomes a small winning combination. One of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in FIG. 17-28(a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

The first small winning symbol shown in FIG. 17-28(a) is a decorative symbol showing the number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a "middle" symbol. This is a combination of decorative symbols in which a red rectangular decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C indicating a message "V" indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. As for the second small winning pattern, a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a jackpot is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in blue indicating a message "V" indicating that the game is controlled in a gaming state. For the third small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a time-saving symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in red indicating the message "time" indicating that the object is controlled by the state. For the 4th small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a time-saving symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in blue, indicating the message "time" that indicates that the object is controlled by the state. For the 5th small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a "7" symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a white rectangular decorative pattern indicating the message "Small" is displayed. The first small winning symbol and the second small winning symbol are a combination of decorative symbols that suggest that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The third small winning symbol and the fourth small winning symbol are a combination of decorative symbols that suggest that the time saving state is controlled.

In the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17-28(b), when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 , the confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small winning symbol, is determined to be the 3rd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small winning symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 3rd small winning symbol. Also, the second small winning symbol is determined at a high rate, and the first small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small winning symbol. With such a configuration, the expectation level for the game ball to pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 and be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends is the same as when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. is higher than when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher when the 3rd small winning pattern was derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern than when the 4th small winning pattern was derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, by deriving and displaying the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol that suggests that the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decoration symbol, the player can: Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to create a sense of expectation that the time saving state will be controlled, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Specifically, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 17-28(b), the small win type is "small win C" or "small win C" where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case of "Small hit D", the confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be the 1st small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small winning symbol, and is determined to be the 2nd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 1st small winning symbol. , the fourth small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small winning symbol, and the third small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small winning symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the time saving area 063AK20 and be controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends is higher than when the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbol. is higher than when the 4th small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and higher when the 4th small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol than when the 2nd small winning symbol is derived and displayed. , when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern is higher than when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. It is configured so that it is not determined by a winning symbol. According to such a configuration, when the game ball is in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, although the time saving shift control based on the passing is not performed, the game ball is controlled to the time saving state as a fixed decorative symbol. The 3rd small winning symbol or the 4th small winning symbol suggesting that the winning symbol is displayed is derived, and the player has an expectation that the game ball will be controlled to a time saving state based on the fact that it has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. The structure is designed to prevent players from having problems and suppress a decline in interest in gaming. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to derive and display the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol that suggests that the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decoration symbol in the normal state, while the fixed ornament symbol in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. By being configured so that the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, a suitable performance can be performed depending on the state.

Returning to FIG. 17-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713, or step 063AKS714, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the production control CPU 120 selects a plurality of types of production control patterns prepared (set) in advance (special pattern variation production control pattern) according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ) and set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time reduction number notification performance is made in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time reduction number notification performance (time reduction number notification performance control pattern) is selected and used. Set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time-saving rush production control is made in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, a production control pattern corresponding to the time-saving rush production is selected and used as a production control pattern (time-saving production control pattern). set.

After executing the process of step 063AKS715, the production control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. settings (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for starting variable display of decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the production control CPU 120 transmits a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative patterns is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the production control CPU 120 performs settings for updating the pending display and active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and executes the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 17-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of the production control process process as the variable display production process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the variable display production process is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the production control process timer. (Step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the production control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the production control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and updates the production control pattern (production control pattern during special figure fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715. ), it is determined whether the end code has been read out in accordance with the updated timer value, thereby determining whether the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS801; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the ready-to-win production period in which the ready-to-win production is executed based on the timer value of the production control process timer. (Step 063AKS802). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special symbol fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is the ready-to-win performance period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win performance (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process in step 063AKS803 or in step 063AKS802, if it is determined that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of time reductions based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. It is determined whether or not it is the time saving number notification effect period during which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification performance period may be predetermined in the performance control pattern (time reduction number notification performance control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. If it is determined that it is the time reduction number notification performance period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time reduction number notification performance (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or if it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time reduction number notification performance period (step 063AKS804; No), the performance control CPU 120, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. It is determined whether it is the time-saving suggestion performance period in which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed (step 063AKS806). The time-saving suggestion production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (special symbol fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving suggestion performance period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time-saving suggestion performance (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807 or in step 063AKS806, if it is determined that it is not the time-saving suggestion performance period (step 063AKS806; No), the performance control CPU 120 will It is determined whether or not it is the time-saving rush performance period in which the rush performance is executed (step 063AKS808). The time-saving entry presentation period may be predetermined in the presentation control pattern (time-saving entry presentation control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving entry performance period (step 063AKS808; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time-saving entry performance (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time-shortening production period (step 063AKS808; No), the production control CPU 120 adjusts the settings in the production control pattern determined in step 063AKS715, etc. Based on this, other controls are performed to execute effects during variable display including variable display operations of decorative symbols (step 063AKS810), and the effect processing during variable display is ended.

In step 063AKS801, if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063 AKS811; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the variable display performance process.

If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the production control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 to control the "left", "center" ”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the determined decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the production control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the production process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process for the special symbol. is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the variable display performance process is ended.

FIG. 17-30(a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of the production control process process as the special figure per waiting process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the special figure hit waiting process is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the winning start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the winning start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). If it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904) to promote right-handed hitting. After clearing the performance flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed hitting promotion performance (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process in step 063AKS906, or if it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), in step 063AKS903, the sub-side time saving count value is not "0". If it is determined (step 063AKS903; No), the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and executes the special figure per waiting process. end.

If it is determined in step 063 AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command has not elapsed (step 063 AKS901; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the jackpot start production (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the production process flag to "6", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot production process. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process per special drawing ends.

In step 063AKS908, if it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command corresponding to the small winning has been received. Determination is made (step 063AKS912). If it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the small winning has not been received (step 063 AKS912; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the special symbol winning waiting process.

If it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063 AKS912; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small winning start performance time to any one of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the performance control CPU 120 determines the small hit start performance time when the small hit type is "small hit" by referring to the small hit start performance time determination table shown in FIG. 17-30(b). The value stored in the small win start performance timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is determined to be one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on which one of "A" to "Small win E" is selected. The small hit start performance time timer value, which is , is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start performance time. The small winning type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 17-30(b), in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, When the small hit type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D", the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, and when the small win type is "Small hit E", the small hit start performance The time is set to a first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 17-30(a), after executing the process of step 063AKS913, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the small hit start performance (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the performance process flag during the small hit. After updating to "4", which is the value corresponding to the production process (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

FIG. 17-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the production control process process as the small hit production process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the small hit performance process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start performance time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start performance timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start performance time elapses depending on whether the updated small hit start performance time timer value is "0" or not. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the small hit start performance time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS1001; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small win performance process.

If it is determined that the small hit start performance time has elapsed (step 063 AKS1001; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the small hit start performance end flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on ( Step 063AKS1002). If it is determined that the small hit start performance end flag is not on (step 063 AKS1002; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the small win start performance (step 063 AKS1004), and turns on the small win start performance end flag. state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063 AKS1006; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal passing promotion performance (step 063 AKS1007), and ends the small winning performance process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS1006; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving time passing promotion production (step 063 AKS1008), and ends the small hit production process. do.

In step 063 AKS1002, if it is determined that the small hit start performance end flag is on (step 063 AKS1002; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has been received ( Step 063AKS1003). If it is determined that the winning end designation command corresponding to the small winning has not been received (step 063 AKS1003; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small winning performance process.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063 AKS1003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the small winning start production end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063 AKS1009), and passes. After performing control to end the normal time passing promotion performance or the short time passing promotion performance that is being executed as the time promotion production (step 063AKS1010), the value of the production process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end production process. 5” (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063 AKS1011, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win. Determination is made (step 063AKS1012).

If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1012; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the third special time ( Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passing notification performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063 AKS1014; No), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal jackpot area passing notification production (step 063 AKS1015), and ends the small hit production processing. do. If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS1014; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving time jackpot area passing notification production (step 063 AKS1016), and ends the small winning production process. do.

In step 063 AKS1012, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1012; No), the production control CPU 120 specifies the end of the hit according to the small hit. It is determined whether either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1017; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the second special time ( Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passing notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving area passage notification performance (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit performance process.

In step 063 AKS1017, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1017; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the first special The time is set (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passing notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the loss area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit performance process.

FIG. 17-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the performance control process process as the small hit end performance process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the small hit end performance process is started, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the passing notification performance time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passage notification performance time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the updated passage notification performance time timer value is "0" or not, whether or not the passage notification performance time has elapsed is determined. Determine whether If it is determined that the passing notification performance time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS1101; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small hit end performance process.

When it is determined that the passing notification performance time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit end designation command 1 and the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. It is determined whether any has been received (step 063AKS1102). If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1102; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command. (Step 063 AKS1103), the value of the production process flag is updated to "3" which is the value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (Step 063 AKS1104), and the small hit end production process is ended.

In step 063 AKS1102, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1102; No), the production control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. It is determined whether either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets the sub side time saving flag to the on state (step 063AKS1106 ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received as the winning end designation command corresponding to the small hit. A side time saving count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When receiving the small winning end designation command 3 indicating that the time saving state will be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning gaming state ends, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving number count value is Set to "5". When receiving the small winning end designation command 4 indicating that the time saving state will be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once after the small winning gaming state ends, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving number count value is set. Set to "1".

In step 063 AKS1105, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1105; No), the production control CPU 120 determines that the sub side time saving flag is on. It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

If it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed hitting. After clearing the performance flag and setting it to an off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed hitting promotion performance (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or if it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that it is not (Step 063AKS1109; No), the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (Step 063AKS1113), and End the rendering process.

Hereinafter, an example of the performance operation related to the characteristic part 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 17-33 to 17-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 17-33 and 17-34, an example of the performance operation when a small winning variation is executed in a normal state will be described. Specifically, below, the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, and during the small hit fluctuation, the reach effect of Super Reach A and the time-saving suggestion effect are executed, and the third small hit symbol is introduced as a confirmed decorative pattern. The following is an example of a case where is derived and displayed.

FIG. 17-33(a) shows that in the normal state, a losing symbol (“135”) is displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates a stopped display state. Figure 17-33(b) shows that in the normal state, small winning fluctuations are started, and the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It shows the state in which

FIG. 17-33(c) shows a state in which a reach is established and a reach effect of super reach A is performed in which a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. .

In Fig. 17-33(d), the time-saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined loss pattern ("767") is temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates a stopped display state. FIG. 17-24(e) shows a state in which a variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the time-saving suggestion performance. Figure 17-33(f) shows a state in which the time-saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time-saving suggestion performance. There is. Figure 17-33 (g) shows a state in which decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time-saving suggestion performance. It shows.

In FIG. 17-33 (h), the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small winning fluctuation This indicates that the process has ended.

In FIG. 17-33(i), control to the small winning game state is started, and as a small winning start effect, an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a message saying, ``Aim to the right! A right arrow image AK8 showing the message ``Put the ball here!'' and a small hit start image AK9 showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the message ``Put the ball here!'' are executed. It shows the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 17-33(i), the right-handed driving promotion effect is started in response to the start of the control to the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-33(i) is executed, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(a) is executed. FIG. 17-34(a) shows a state in which the normal passing excitement effect is being executed. In the normal passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-34(a), a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2, a time saving area passage promotion image AK3, and a losing area passage promotion image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. , displays the normal pass promotion image AK1 including , and causes the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 of the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit the message "Jackpot". Is it short? Is it time saving? Am I a loser?'' A production that outputs a normal-time provocative voice message is performed.

Hereinafter, in the normal state, when the normal passing promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes the jackpot area 063AK19 will be explained.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(b) is executed. FIG. 17-34(b) shows a state in which the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed and the normal jackpot area passing notification image AK10 indicating the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

In FIG. 17-34(c), after the small winning gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and as a jackpot start effect, an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and " A first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" and a second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball to the attacker!" are being executed. There is. The second jackpot start image AK12 is an effect image that urges the player to win a game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIG. 17-34(c), the right-handed driving promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

Next, a description will be given of the performance operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 while the normal passing promotion performance is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(a) is completed, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(d) is executed. FIG. 17-34(d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passing notification effect is executed and a time-saving area passing notification image AK13 indicating the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 17-34(e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 that is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display after the small winning game state ends, and as a time-saving entry effect. , an effect is executed to display a first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Save time!" and a second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" This indicates the state in which the In the state shown in FIG. 17-34(e), the right-handed hitting promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 17-34(e), the time saving number notification effect is executed in response to the time saving state being controlled, and the time saving number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode showing that the number of times is 4.

Next, in the normal state, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 while the normal passing promotion effect is being executed will be explained.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the losing area 063AK21, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(a) is completed, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-34(f) is executed. FIG. 17-34(f) shows a state in which the losing area passing notification effect is executed and a losing area passing notification image AK17 indicating the message "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 17-34 (g) shows that after the small winning game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display starts, "left", "middle", This shows a state in which variable display is being performed in each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 17-35 and 17-36, an example of the performance operation when a small winning variation is executed in the time saving state will be described. Specifically, below, a case will be described in which a small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, a reach effect of super reach A is executed during the small win variation, and a third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol. This will be explained using an example.

FIG. 17-35(a) shows that in the time saving state, a losing symbol (“135”) is displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates a stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 17-35(a), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is being executed, and a right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 17-35(a), the time saving number notification effect is being executed, and the time saving number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 indicating that the number of time saving times is 4. It is displayed in the following manner.

Fig. 17-35(b) shows that in the time saving state, small winning fluctuations are started, and the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It shows the state in which In the state shown in FIG. 17-35(b), the display mode of the time saving number notification image AK16 is updated in accordance with the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of time saving times is 3. has been done.

FIG. 17-35(c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 representing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 17-35(d), the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small winning fluctuation This indicates that the process has ended.

In FIG. 17-35(e), the control to the small win game state is started, the small win start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Indicates the condition. In the state shown in FIG. 17-35(e), in response to the start of control to the small winning game state, the right-handed driving promotion effect continues to be executed, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

In the time saving state, after the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-35(e) is executed, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-36(a) is executed. FIG. 17-36(a) shows a state in which the time-saving passing promotion effect is being executed. In the time-saving time passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-36(a), the time-saving time passing promotion image including a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 and a losing area passage promotion image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and without causing the time-saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 of the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light, the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a message such as "Is it a jackpot? Loss? A production that outputs a sound encouraging the passage of time to save time is performed, which shows the message "I wonder if it is?".

Hereinafter, in the time saving state, when the time saving time passing promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 will be explained.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 17-36(b) is executed. FIG. 17-36(b) shows a state in which the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect is executed and the time-saving jackpot area passing notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows.

FIG. 17-36(c) shows that after the small win game state ends, the jackpot start effect is executed under control of the jackpot game state, and the first jackpot start image AK11 and the second jackpot are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A state in which the start image AK12 is displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 17-36(c), the right-hand hitting promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-hand hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

Next, in the time saving state, when the time saving time pass promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 will be explained. In the time saving state, the same performance operation is performed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21, the performance operation shown in FIG. 17-36(a) ends, and the performance operation shown in FIG. 17-36(d) is executed. be done. FIG. 17-36(d) shows a state in which the losing area passing notification effect is executed and the losing area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 17-36(e) shows that after the small winning game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without changing, the next variable display starts, "left", "middle", This shows a state in which variable display is being performed in each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in FIG. 17-36(e), the display mode of the time saving number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of time saving times is 2. has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 17-36(e), the right-handed driving promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed.

As explained above, in the characteristic part 063AK, the small winning symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). If the game ball (gaming medium) passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time-saving mode is changed from the normal state to the time-saving state. state (special state), while in the time-saving state, a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball is in the time-saving state. When passing through area 063AK20, time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the time saving state When a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special figure game and the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, different effects can be executed depending on the case where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. . According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

In addition, in the feature part 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. Configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Further, the characteristic part 063AK is configured to be able to perform different performances when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, different effects are variably displayed when small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game in the normal state and when small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game in the time saving state. Configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

In addition, in the feature part 063AK, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special pattern game in the normal state, it is controlled to a time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small winning symbol will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is configured such that a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests the above can be executed while the variable display is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, the price is higher than when the small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled to shorten the time according to the ratio. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a preview preview performance, the display mode of the pending display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in normal times, so that the display mode corresponding to the pending display can be changed. In the display, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to be in the open state in the small winning gaming state is controlled to be in the small winning gaming state, and is in any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21. It may also be configured to be able to execute a hold display change effect that foretells that the vehicle will pass through a certain point.

For example, by using the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not started yet is changed to blue, green, or red, which is different from the normal white color, so that the hold display Changes in the display mode can be recognized, and the game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area is controlled to be in the small winning gaming state, and the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state is The configuration may be such that it is possible to suggest that the object passes through either 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21.

Specifically, in the case where the pending display change effect is configured to be executable as a pre-read notice, the pre-read judgment is performed based on the occurrence of a starting prize in the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. It's fine if you do it. In the pre-reading determination, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 17-12(b). , the process of pre-reading and determining whether the variable display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss", and when it is pre-reading and determining that the variable display result is a "small hit", the process shown in Figure 17-14 By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining which of the small winning types is to be set as "small winning A" to "small winning E" is performed. Bye. After that, in the starting winning determination process, settings may be made to transmit a starting winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading determination.

The starting winning command that has been set to be sent in the starting winning determination process is transmitted as the main prize by executing the command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The starting winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is stored in a starting winning time provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 by executing command analysis processing in step S75 of the production control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It only needs to be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-read notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process processing, in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11, whether or not to execute a pending display change effect as a pre-read notice effect. It is only necessary to decide the execution mode.

In the reservation memory that is stored when deciding whether to execute the reservation display change performance and the execution mode, there are reservations where the variable display result is a "big hit" and a reservation where the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is , if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 and is held in "small win C" or "small win D", then after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, the destination By changing from the normal state to the time-saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of advance notice, the variable display is Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the content suggested by the pending display change effect as a look-ahead preview effect and the actual variable display result or variation pattern, causing distrust among players and reducing their interest in the game. There is a possibility.

Therefore, among the stored holds, there is a hold where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". If any of the above is included, execution of the pending display change effect may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

For example, in the prefetch notice setting process, there is a hold whose variable display result is "Jackpot" and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or " If there is no reservation that results in "small hit D", according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 17-37 (a), according to the variable display result and the small hit type. , it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the manner in which it is executed. On the other hand, among the stored holds, there are holds where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". If any of the following is included, the variable display result and the small hit will be determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in the limit time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 17-37(b). Depending on the type, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the manner in which it is executed. Among the stored holds, there is a hold where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D", Whether or not it is included can be determined by checking the contents of the starting winning buffer.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in Figure 17-37 (a), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than when it is determined not to execute (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the pending display is determined to be green at a higher rate than blue, and the display mode of the pending display is determined to be red at a higher rate than green. With this configuration, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when the pending display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the pending display is displayed in green it is higher than when it is displayed in blue. It is higher when the hold display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limit pending change determination table, as shown in FIG. 17-37(b), execution of the pending display change effect in which the jackpot expectation level is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIG. 17-37(b), the pending display change effect in which the pending display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to only "not executed".

In addition, in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 17-37 (a) and the limit time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 17-37 (b), when the variable display result becomes "small hit", the variable display We have shown an example in which the display format is determined to be the same as when the result is a "jackpot", but this is just an example, and the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" or A display mode peculiar to the case of “small win B” (for example, “Jackpot?”), or a case where the variable display result is “small win” and the small win type is “small win C” or “small win D” There may be a unique display mode (“time?”). According to such a configuration, variations in the hold display change effects are increased, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result becomes "small hit" in the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small win type is set to the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on the case where a pending memory that results in a "small win C" or "small win D" passing through is included, and the case where such a pending memory is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For example, in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "Small hit", and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". '', the time saving state may be controlled again by any of the remaining second special game game holds (remaining hold) after the time saving state ends (the second special game Execute a return success effect that informs that there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". Bye. On the other hand, the special figure display result becomes "small win" in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". If there is no hold that is included, the time saving state will not be controlled again by any of the remaining holds (the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game) , there is no pending event where the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D"). As an example, both the successful return performance and the failed return performance are a common performance in which a combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after a performance that incites whether or not the time-saving state will be controlled again as a common performance. Good to have.

In the embodiment described above, as a performance corresponding to the small winning fluctuation, the game ball is displayed without suggesting that the winning game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, which is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot promotion effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, and also when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect that suggests that the game ball did not pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passing, the game ball enters the time saving state after the small winning gaming state ends. It may also be configured to be able to execute a relief effect that suggests that it will be controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For example, as a jackpot promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-38(a), a message "Jackpot" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a jackpot suggestion suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 is shown. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute an effect that displays a jackpot promotion image AK19 including an image AK20 and a loss suggestion image AK21 that shows a message "Lose" and suggests that the game ball passes through a loss area 063AK21. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, as a loss effect, the loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot promotion image AK19 is highlighted as shown in FIG. 17-38(b). All you have to do is execute. In the state shown in FIG. 17-38(b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20, which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the performance action shown in FIG. 17-38(b) as a loss performance, as a rescue performance, as shown in FIG. 17-38(c), in a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed, Displays the message "Time saving" and displays the time saving suggestion image AK22 that suggests that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, ends the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21, and highlights the time saving suggestion image AK22. All you have to do is perform the performance. In the state shown in FIG. 17-38(c), the frame line of the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 and loss suggestion image AK21, which are not highlighted, so that the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. The description has been made assuming that when it is determined that it has not been determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not to set the special figure display result to be a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is just an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. can be executed in this order. For example, after executing a process to determine whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit", if the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" in the process, the special figure display It may be configured to execute processing for determining whether or not the result is a "big hit." Alternatively, by determining whether the special pattern display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" through a single process, it is determined whether the special pattern display result is a "big hit" or not. The process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" may be executed simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. It has been explained that the balls other than the game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is just an example, and the configuration is such that a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this case, after one game ball enters the sorting section 063AK18 and passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, at least one other game ball may enter the distribution section 063AK18 and pass through other areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning game state, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 first passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. Based on this, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends may be controlled. For example, if the game ball that first enters the distribution section 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, even if other game balls pass through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after passing through, the first Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the control may be changed to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends.

Or, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning gaming state, which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 did the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 pass through? Based on this, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends may be controlled. For example, if the game ball that last entered the distribution section 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning game state, other game balls may have passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 before passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the control may be changed to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends.

Alternatively, a priority order is set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls that enter the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning gaming state are placed in the jackpot area 063AK19. , When the game ball passes through multiple areas among the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21, the game after the small winning gaming state ends based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas that the game ball passed through. The state may also be controlled. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, it is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 with the highest priority. After the small win game state ends, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 which was controlled to be in the open state in the small winning gaming state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passing is performed. It was explained that it was not possible. However, this is just an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4, which was controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state, passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage, It may be possible to extend the period during which the time saving state is controlled by performing time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this case, based on the fact that the game ball that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the time saving state passed through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect is created to notify that the period of time controlled in the time saving state has been extended. It may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, as a performance to notify that the period during which the time saving state is controlled has been extended, a time saving number recovery performance may be performed to increase the number of time saving times indicated by the number of time saving number notification image AK16.

In addition, in this case, when in the time saving state, a suggestion regarding passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 and a losing area 063AK21 is made without making a suggestion regarding passing through the time saving area 063AK20 (the game ball does not pass through the time saving area 063AK20). (Suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21) Instead of the time-saving time passing promotion effect, the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time-saving area 063AK20 and the passing through the losing area 063AK21 (suggesting that the gaming ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the gaming ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the gaming ball passes through the losing area 063AK21) ) It may also be configured to be able to perform a normal-time passing promotion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to small winning fluctuations, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state, enters the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. , may be configured to be executable during execution of the small winning variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, if the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, an effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 is changed to the small win fluctuation. Executed during execution, if the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is created. Executed during execution of small hit variation, if the small win type is "small win E" in which the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, a small hit is performed that suggests that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It may be configured to be executed while the fluctuation is being executed.

In the above embodiment, the normal passing promotion performance and the short time passing promotion performance are started in response to the completion of the small winning variation, the completion of the small winning start performance, and the start of opening and closing of the big prize opening. It was explained as follows. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing promotion performance and the time saving time passing promotion performance may be configured to be able to be started while the small winning variation is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In particular, if the normal passing promotion effect is configured to be executable while the small winning variation is being executed, by displaying the normal passing promotion image AK1 during the execution of the small winning variation, the game ball will hit the jackpot in the small winning gaming state. Based on the fact that the small winning game state has passed through the area 063AK19, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small winning gaming state, and the small winning game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning gaming state. It is possible to improve the game interest by suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled to a time saving state after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the losing area 063AK21 in the small winning game state.

In the embodiment described above, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area passing notification effect is provided which displays the time saving area passing notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" on the screen of the image display device 5. While executing the game, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, Sorry! The explanation has been made assuming that a losing area passing notification effect is executed in which a losing area passing notification image AK17 showing a message "A losing area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5." However, this is just an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. It may be a performance of For example, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 is made to emit light, while when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 An effect may be performed in which the light is not emitted (turned off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification sound indicating the message "Time-saving!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while in the time-saving state, the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the object passes, an effect may be performed in which the notification sound is not outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include the time saving area 063AK20, but not include the jackpot area 063AK19 or the losing area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving areas 063AK20. In this case, in the small winning gaming state, depending on which of the plurality of time saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed, the time saving state may be controlled for different periods after the small winning gaming state ends. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small winning gaming state, the small winning gaming state After the small winning game state ends, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times, and if the game ball passes through the second time saving area in the small winning gaming state, after the small winning gaming state ends. , the time saving state may be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small winning game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when in the low probability low base state as the normal state, time saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning gaming state, and the small winning gaming state is The explanation has been made assuming that the time saving state is controlled after the end of the period. However, this is just an example, and when the high-accuracy/low-base state is in the high-accuracy/low-base state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small-hit gaming state, and the small-hitting gaming state is It may be configured such that the time saving state is controlled after the end of the period.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any manner.

Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 063AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

For example, the feature section 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature part 063AK, during the first period of the normal time passing promotion performance, time saving time passing promotion performance, super reach A to super reach C reach performance as predetermined performances, It is possible to display an effect animation whose progress speed is a first speed on the image display device 5 serving as a display means, and in a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is the first speed. It is possible to display an effect animation at a second speed slower than the above speed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be displayed in both the first period and the second period. It may be configured such that the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means can output the same speed at the same speed. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the predetermined performances include the normal time passage promotion performance, the time saving time passage promotion performance, and the super reach A~ Since the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the reach performance of super reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 063AK is:
A gaming machine (e.g. Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.),
a state control means (such as the CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (such as a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
It has a special area (e.g. time saving area 063AK20 etc.), and has a first state (e.g. open state) in which game media (e.g. game balls etc.) can easily enter, and a second state (e.g. (closed state, etc.); variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be controlled;
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, in FIG. 17-6, FIG. -8, Figure 17-23, etc.),
The state control means includes:
If the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, based on the passage, the Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIG. 17-23, FIG. 17-26, etc.),
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control is performed based on the passage. (e.g., Figures 17-23, 17-26, etc.)
The effect execution means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area; In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, different effects can be performed depending on when the game medium passes through the special area. (e.g., FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-23, FIG. 17-24, FIG. 17-31, FIG. 17-34, FIG. 17-36, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above regarding the feature part 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the gaming medium to the advantageous state when it passes through the specific area (for example, FIGS. 17-23, 17-26, etc.);
The performance execution means executes the same performance when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state. can be executed (for example, FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-23, FIG. 17-24, FIG. 17-31, FIG. 17-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above regarding the feature part 063AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 17 -8, Figure 17-23, Figure 17-24, Figure 17-31, Figure 17-34, Figure 17-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (3) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
The effect execution means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. Can be executed while variable display is being executed (for example, FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-9, FIG. 17-15, FIG. 17-16, FIG. 17-19, FIG. 17-33, FIG. 17-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (4) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means executes a command in the special state as a performance that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result. It is possible to perform a performance that suggests that the variable display will be controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestive performance) while the variable display is being executed (for example, Fig. 17-8, Fig. 17-9, Fig. 17-15, Fig. 17-16, Fig. 17). -19, Figure 17-33, Figure 17-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (5) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure game, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure game, etc.),
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is displayed at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information. (e.g., Figure 17-14),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the result of variable display of the second identification information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 064AK)
Characteristic section 063AK includes characteristic section 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 064AK is:
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can perform a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
a state control means (such as the CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (such as a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
It has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.) and a special area (for example, time saving area 063AK20, etc.), and has a first state (for example, open state) into which game media (for example, game balls, etc.) can easily enter, and a game state. a second state in which the medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, a closed state, etc.); and variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be controlled;
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on passing through the specific area (for example, FIGS. 17-23, 17-26, etc.),
It is possible to control from the normal state to the special state based on the game medium passing through the special area (for example, FIG. 17-23, FIG. 17-26, etc.);
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a normal-time passage promotion effect) for suggesting passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state. Yes (for example, Figure 17-8, Figure 17-10, Figure 17-31, Figure 17-34, etc.),
If the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (for example, Figure 17-23, Figure 17-26, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The performance execution means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, executing the special effect (for example, FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-10, FIG. 17-31, FIG. 17-34, etc.);
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect (for example, a time-saving passage promotion effect) that makes a suggestion about passing through the specific area without making a suggestion about passing through the special area. ) (e.g., Figure 17-8, Figure 17-10, Figure 17-31, Figure 17-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 17 -8, Figure 17-23, Figure 17-24, Figure 17-31, Figure 17-34, Figure 17-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, in FIG. 17-6, FIG. 17- 8, Figures 17-23, etc.)
The effect execution means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. Can be executed while variable display is being executed (for example, FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-9, FIG. 17-15, FIG. 17-16, FIG. 17-19, FIG. 17-33, FIG. 17-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means executes a process in the special state as a performance that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result. It is possible to execute a production that suggests that the display will be controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestion production) while the variable display is being executed (for example, Fig. 17-8, Fig. 17-9, Fig. 17-15, Fig. 17-16, Fig. 17). -19, Figure 17-33, Figure 17-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described in (3) to (5) above regarding the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect executing means is configured to control the game medium when the special display result is derived as a variable display result and the variable means is controlled to the second state after the variable means is controlled to the first state. It is possible to perform different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area and when the game medium passes through the special area (for example, FIG. 17-8, FIG. 17-23, FIG. 17-24, FIG. 17-31 , Figure 17-34, Figure 17-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 065AK)
The characteristic part 065AK will be explained. In the feature section 065AK, descriptions of parts (configuration, processing, etc.) that are common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic description, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, it was possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined "time-saving symbol" among the "normal symbol losses". In this case, the machine is controlled to a high base state (time saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the low base state may shift to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so it is possible to provide unexpected gameplay.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time-saving symbol", the low base state shifts to the high base state even if the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. It looks like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK is capable of executing a predetermined effect that suggests or notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. By a predetermined effect, it is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol will be a "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot". Such a predetermined effect can make the player look forward to which display result will be suggested or notified, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(Configuration of characteristic part 065AK)
FIG. 18-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic part 065AK, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK differs from the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of some components. In addition, here, mainly the parts different from FIG. 1 will be explained, and the same components will be given the same numbers and the explanation will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK shown in FIG. You will be guided to the lower side of the gaming area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and either win (enter) into each winning opening, or go to the out exit without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Shooting the game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed hitting, and shooting the game ball so that it passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. This is called a right-handed hit. The area where a game ball hit to the left can be guided is called the left area, and the area where a game ball hit to the right can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left area of the gaming area, similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the winning ball device 6A is provided in the left area of the gaming area. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided at the lower right of the image display device 5 and in the right area of the gaming area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is in the open state or in the jackpot game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is in the open state, the game can be played by hitting right. In a low base state in which the prize opening is not open, the game is played by hitting left-handed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, passage gates 41 are provided in the left and right areas, making it easier to play the Futu game even in a low base state where the game is played by left-handed players. . Thereby, in the low base state, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time-saving symbol" and it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic part 065AK, general winning holes 10 are provided in the left area and the right area. In addition, the general winning a prize opening 10 may be provided in either one area|region.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a is provided at a position above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3. It is provided near the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic section 065AK will be explained. FIG. 18-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, the game ball passes through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step S412). do.

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the gate passing memory counter (the number of gate passing memories) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is incremented by 1, and the value of the normal symbol determination random number, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number. Also, the number of lights on the ordinary figure reservation display 25C is increased by one. After that, depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag, any one of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed.

In the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, the CPU 103 determines that the normal symbol is not in a state in which it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, the normal symbol display 20 is not in a state where the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and the variable winning (when the ball device 6B is not in an open state) and the number of gate passing memories is not 0, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in Figure 18-3 Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make it a hit (whether or not to make a stop symbol of a normal symbol a winning symbol) and whether to make it a time-saving symbol. If the gaming state is a low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in Figure 18-3 (A), and if the gaming state is a high base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in Figure 18-3 (A). example), use the table shown in Figure 18-3(B). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("1" in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to a value corresponding to the variable display time (ordinary symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and then derived and displayed. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, control is executed to send a command specifying the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols to the performance control board 12. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) according to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbols in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, check whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, update the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (in this example, "3") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). .

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing of step S403. Then, start the normal pattern process timer by setting a value equivalent to the normal pattern confirmation time (stop pattern display time) in the normal pattern process timer, and when the timer times out, the normal pattern stop pattern becomes a winning pattern. Check if it exists. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), and if it is a time-saving symbol, a process for starting a time-saving state is executed. Further, if it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory release time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (normal electric accessory) 6B in an open state in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 18-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding the display result of the normal symbol that determines the display result of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range that the random number for normal symbol determination can take is 1 to 250, but the determination value is set in the normal symbol determination table by comparison with the random number for normal symbol determination.

FIG. 18-3(A) is a normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 18-3(A), in the low base state, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). When it is determined that the winning ball has won, the variable winning ball device 6A remains open for 5 seconds. If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 3 and 230, it is determined that it is a loss (ordinary symbol loss). If it is determined that the winning ball has lost, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state. In the case of winning a normal pattern or losing a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds, and the pattern confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 231 and 240, it is determined that it is a loss (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that it is the time saving symbol A, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in the open state, but is controlled to be in the high base state (time saving state). In the case of time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, when the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 241 and 250, it is determined that it is a loss (time-saving symbol B). When it is determined that it is the time-saving symbol B, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in the open state, but is controlled to be in the high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbols are part of the loss (normal pattern loss), and a part of the determination value corresponding to the normal pattern loss is assigned to the time-saving pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not it is a common symbol, it is determined whether or not to use a time-saving symbol. By doing this, when it is determined that the symbol is a winning symbol and a time-saving symbol due to a random number error, etc., priority can be given to winning a symbol. In addition, in a low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to get a time-saving symbol than to hit a normal symbol, so first decide whether to use a time-saving symbol or not, and then play the normal symbol. It may be determined whether the figure is correct or not.

In this example, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-saving symbols) is different between the time-saving symbol A and the time-saving symbol B. , as shown in Figure 18-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times (the number of time savings will be 50 times). In addition, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (the number of time savings becomes 100). Therefore, the time-saving symbol B is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving symbol A.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether or not to use a time-saving symbol in the case of a loss of a regular symbol and the type of time-saving symbol are determined by the random number for determining the regular symbol, but different random numbers may be used to determine the type of the time-saving symbol. It is also possible to determine whether or not to use a time-saving symbol and the type of the time-saving symbol. Moreover, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, the process of determining the display result is facilitated by determining whether or not it is a time-saving symbol using the random number value for normal symbol determination.

As shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), while the symbol confirmation time for winning or losing symbols is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by increasing the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to notify that the player will move to a high base state (time-saving state) or hit right during the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent and reduce the situation where the player is at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation due to a sudden transition to a high base state. Note that the symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

In addition, the variation time in the case of time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the variation time in the case of other display results is 10 seconds. With this, it is possible to predict the display result based on the variation time of the normal symbol. Note that the variation time may be determined depending on the display results, or the variation time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 18-3(B) is a normal symbol determination table used in a high base state. As shown in FIG. 18-3(B), in the high base state, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 1 and 229, it is determined to be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). When it is determined that the winning ball has won, the variable winning ball device 6A remains open for 7.5 seconds. When the random number value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss (normal pattern loss). If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 231 and 240, it is determined that it is a loss (time-saving symbol A). If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 241 and 250, it is determined that it is a loss (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time saving symbols (time saving symbols A and B) become available, the number of time savings (the end condition for the high base state) is not updated and the control While high base state is not affected. That is, in the high base state, time-saving symbols are treated the same as ordinary symbols losing. If it is determined that the winning ball has lost, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state.

In the case of the high base state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. This makes it possible to quickly repeat variations in the normal symbols.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined display result of the regular symbol. may be determined. In this case, when the display result is a loss of a normal symbol, the determination ratio of the fluctuation time may be made to differ depending on whether the symbol is a time-saving symbol or not. By doing this, it is possible to suggest whether or not the symbol will become a time-saving symbol based on the variation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in Figures 18-3 (A) and (B), the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, while the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols in the low base state is 10 seconds. It's getting longer, like seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the player will move to the high base state (time-saving state) or hit right at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent and reduce the situation where the player is at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation due to a sudden transition to a high base state. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary, so by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the next normal symbol change can be executed promptly. I can do it. Note that the symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the time saving state is controlled. As shown in Figure 18-5 (A), there are ``Jackpot A'' and ``Jackpot B'' as jackpot types when the display result of the first special drawing is a jackpot. After entering the gaming state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times (time saving number becomes 50 times), and after entering the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B", 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed (the number of time reductions reaches 100). In addition, the display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot basically when the base is low. In addition, as shown in Figure 18-5 (B), "Jackpot C" is provided as a jackpot type when the display result of the second special drawing is a jackpot, and the jackpot game state of "Jackpot C" After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (the number of time saving times becomes 100 times). In addition, the display result of the second special drawing becomes a jackpot basically when the base is high.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (time saving number) of the high base state (time saving state) is such that the display result of the second special pattern is a jackpot compared to the case where the display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot. It is more advantageous if this happens. Thereby, since the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and shifts to the high base state, the ending condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's disappointment can be suppressed. Also, when the base is high, the conditions for ending the high base state (time saving state) in the event of a jackpot are more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easier to maintain the high base state for a long time. I can do it.

In addition, in the feature part 065AK, it is sufficient that the game is controlled to at least the time saving state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the number of rounds of "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot C" and the presence or absence of probability change control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot types and the number of time savings shown in FIG. 18-5 are just examples, and the number of jackpot types may be greater or less than those shown in FIG. 18-5, or, for example, the number of time savings may be all the same.

FIG. 18-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 18-2. In the ordinary symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ordinary symbol confirmed display flag is set (step 065 AKS001). Normal symbols are displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses after the display result is derived and displayed. That is, the symbol confirmation time can also be said to be the period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variation of the normal symbol starts. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the regular symbol confirmed display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the ordinary symbol (confirmed ordinary symbol) is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. Settings for transmitting the designated general figure stop designation command to the production control board 12 are executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065 AKS003, the production control board 12 is set to send a normal pattern stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal pattern can be specified. Then, the symbol confirmation period (see Figure 18-3) is set according to the gaming state (high base state, low base state) and the normal pattern display result (step 065 AKS004), and the normal pattern confirmed display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the process at the time of normal symbol stop is ended.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation period for the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, it is determined whether or not the timer value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted and becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065 AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol confirmation period has passed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether the display result is a common symbol (step 065AKS012). If the display result is a normal pattern (Step 065AKS012; Yes), set the normal electric accessory opening time to the normal symbol process timer (Step 065AKS013), and set the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal electric accessory release time. It is updated to a value (for example, "4") indicating medium processing (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is ended.

If the display result is not a common symbol (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether the time-saving flag is set or not, thereby determining whether the high base state is present (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot gaming state, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, if the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a jackpot, the time saving state will be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot, so the time saving symbol will be changed. The transition to the time-saving state based on this may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time-saving flag is set to ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time-saving number counter is set to the number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving symbol (see Figure 18-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). Thereby, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). In addition, in response to the transition to the time saving state, settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command specifying the time saving state to the production control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a regular symbol loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (for example, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 065AKS021), and the normal symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 18-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing (step S76) shown in FIG. 8 of the characteristic section 065AK. In the production control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK, in addition to the production control process processing of the basic explanation shown in FIG. Notification setting processing (step 065AKS2) is now executed.

FIG. 18-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ordinary symbol linked production control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the production control process process of FIG. 18-7. The normal symbol linked performance is a performance that suggests and informs the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the normal symbol. The general map linked production is included in the predetermined production. In the conventional figure interlocking effect control process, control for executing the conventional figure interlocking effect is performed.

In the production control process linked to common figures, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution flag linked to common figures is set (step 065AKS031). The flag is set when execution of the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance is started as a predetermined performance. If the general figure linked production execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is checked whether the special figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure linked production execution flag is set when execution of the special figure linked production is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to perform a special symbol-linked performance that suggests and informs the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as a predetermined performance. The special figure linked production will be described later. If the special figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065 AKS032; Yes), that is, if the special figure linked production is being executed as a predetermined production, a new predetermined production (regular picture linked production) is executed. Therefore, the general figure linked production control process is ended.

If the special symbol linked production execution flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not a normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol variation start designation command has not been received (step 065 AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking production control process is ended.

If the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065 AKS051; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-time saving flag is in the on state or not, thereby determining whether or not the high base state is present. (Step 065AKS052). If it is in a high base state (step 065 AKS052; Yes), the fluctuation frequency of the normal symbol is high and the display result is almost always a hit on the common symbol, so the common symbol linked effect is not executed and the normal symbol linked effect control process is performed. end.

If it is not a high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the performance control process flag. In that case, when the value of the performance control process flag is 6 or more, it is assumed that the state is a jackpot game state. If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065 AKS053; Yes), in order not to disturb the performance during the jackpot, and because it is controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to play the game without executing the jackpot linked performance. The figure-linked effect control process ends.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, a variation is being executed according to a variation pattern accompanied by a super reach, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 065 AKS056; Yes), the general figure linked effect control process is ended without executing the normal figure linked effect in order to attract attention to the super reach reach effect. In addition, even if you do not perform the general figure linked effect during the execution of effects other than the super reach effect (notice effects on the image display device 5, movement effects of the movable body 32, effects with high expectations for jackpot, etc.) good.

If the reach performance of super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined performance pattern corresponding to whether or not to perform the normal pattern linked performance and the performance mode in the case of execution is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 18-8(B), depending on the display result of the normal symbols specified from the normal symbol variation start designation command, whether or not to perform the normal symbol linked effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined.

FIG. 18-8(C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol will be a loss, and the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "normal symbol", and the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "time-saving symbol". The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns that suggest that the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol, and the degree of expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot is higher with the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than with the predetermined performance pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined performances of all the predetermined performance patterns are started in the same manner, and then the results according to the predetermined performance patterns are notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined performance pattern SP1 indicates a loss, it can be expected that another predetermined performance pattern will be used at the start of the performance.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a false pattern suggesting a loss may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as ``Maybe it will save time?'' to suggest that the display result of a normal symbol will become a time-saving symbol, then displays an image such as ``Unfortunate'' to indicate that the result will not be a time-saving symbol. may be provided.

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the Fuzu-zu linked production are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. It is decided which one to use. As shown in FIG. 18-8 (B), when the display result of the normal symbol (common symbol display result) is "normal symbol hit", the proportion determined to the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is high, If it is a "loss", there is a high probability that the predetermined performance pattern SP1 will be selected, and if it is "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially if it is "time saving symbol B" which has a large number of time savings. has a high rate of being determined as the predetermined effect pattern SP3. Thereby, it is possible to suggest and notify the result of the display of the common map through the common map linked performance (predetermined performance). Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 18-8(B) is just an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the result of displaying the common map can be suggested and notified by the common map linked performance (predetermined performance). Further, as the predetermined performance pattern for the common map linked performance, a predetermined performance pattern other than the predetermined performance patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the general pattern linked performance (step 065AKS064). If it is not determined to execute the common figure linked effect (step 065 AKS064; No), the common figure linked effect control process is ended.

If it has been decided to execute the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance (Step 065 AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance according to the decision result (predetermined performance pattern) in Step 065 AKS059 is set in the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance timer. The corresponding value is set (step 065AKS078). Then, based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern, etc., a normal figure linked performance (predetermined performance) is started (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the common symbol interlocking performance, the common symbol interlocking performance execution flag is set (step 065 AKS080), and the common symbol interlocking performance control process is ended.

If the flag is set (Step 065AKS031; No), the value of the Fuuzu linked production timer is subtracted by 1 (Step 065AKS034), and the value of the Fuuzu linked production timer becomes 0? It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the common figure interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065 AKS035; No), the general figure interlocking effect control process is ended.

When the value of the Fuzu linked production timer becomes 0 (Step 065AKS035; Yes), the Fuzu linked production is ended (Step 065AKS036), and the Fuzu linked production execution flag is reset to the off state (Step 065AKS037). ), the normal map linked production control process ends.

FIG. 18-9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure-linked effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a special figure-linked effect as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern in the case of execution. The special figure interlocking performance determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. 18-7 before starting the variation of the decorative symbols. In the special figure linked production determination process, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the regular figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). If the flag is set (step 065 AKS091; Yes), that is, if the common map linked performance is being executed as a predetermined performance, a new predetermined performance (special map linked performance) is executed. Therefore, the special figure linked production determination process is ended. If the general map linked production execution flag is not set (step 065 AKS091; No), it is determined whether the sub-time saving flag is on or not, thereby confirming whether or not the high base state is present (step 065 AKS092 ). If it is in a high base state (step 065 AKS092; Yes), the average special figure fluctuation time is short and it is not possible to secure a period for executing the special figure linked effect, so the special figure linked effect is not executed, so the special figure linked effect is not executed. The performance determination process ends.

In addition, since the special figure linked performance determination process is a process executed at the start of variation of decorative symbols, the special figure linked performance is not determined and executed in the case of a jackpot game state or a small win game state. If it is not a high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether the fluctuation to be started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. If the variation pattern is not a super reach miss or a super reach jackpot (step 065 AKS093; No), the special figure linked performance determination process is ended. In this way, in this embodiment, if the variation pattern does not involve a super reach, the special figure linked effect is not executed, but even if the variation pattern does not involve a super reach, the special figure linked effect is performed at a predetermined rate. A performance (for example, a predetermined performance of the predetermined performance pattern SP1) may be executed.

If it is a variation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined performance pattern corresponding to whether or not special symbol linked performance is to be executed and the performance mode when executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 18-9(B), depending on the display result of the special symbol (decoration symbol), whether or not to perform the special symbol-linked performance and a predetermined performance pattern are determined.

The predetermined production patterns corresponding to the special figure linked production are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, the presence or absence of execution of the special figure linked production and the predetermined production pattern SP1 are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 18-9 (B). , SP4, or SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 18-9(B), when the special figure display result is a "jackpot", the percentage of predetermined effect pattern SP5 is determined to be high, and when the special figure display result is a "loss" , the ratio of the predetermined effect pattern SP4 being determined is high. As a result, the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is higher for the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than for the predetermined performance pattern SP4. Since the predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by a super reach, when the special figure interlocking performance of these predetermined performance patterns is executed, it is possible to notify that it will be a super reach. Furthermore, with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 18-9, a jackpot may occur even in the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP1, so a surprising performance can be executed. The determined ratio shown in FIG. 18-9(B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and announced by the special figure linked effect (predetermined effect). Further, as the predetermined performance pattern of the special figure linked performance, a predetermined performance pattern other than the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided not to perform the special figure linked performance (step 065AKS095). If it is determined not to perform the special figure linked effect (step 065 AKS095; Yes), the special figure linked effect determination process is ended. When it is decided to execute the special figure linked production (step 065AKS095; No), settings are made to execute the special figure linked production corresponding to the determined predetermined production pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, performance control data corresponding to a predetermined performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure linked production execution flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure linked production determining process is ended.

FIG. 18-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the production control process process of FIG. 18-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the transition to the time-saving state when the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and the high base state (time-saving state) is controlled. .

In the time-saving notification setting process, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a common symbol stop designation command that specifies that the time-saving symbol has stopped (step 065 AKS101). If the normal pattern stop designation command specifying that the time saving pattern has stopped has not been received (step 065 AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process is ended.

If the normal pattern stop designation command specifying that the time saving pattern has stopped is received (step 065 AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is in the on state or not, and whether the high base state is present or not. It is confirmed whether or not (step 065 AKS102). If it is in the high base state (step 065 AKS102; Yes), the time saving notification setting process is ended because the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub-time saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and the time saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS104). If it is in the jackpot gaming state (step 065 AKS104; Yes), since the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state, the time saving notification setting process is ended without notifying that the time saving state has been entered.

If it is not a jackpot game state (step 065 AKS104; No), a right hit display instructing to hit right is displayed at a predetermined position on the image display device 5 (step 065 AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 065 AKS106). If the reach effect of Super Reach is not being executed (step 065 AKS106; No), settings for starting notification of transition to time saving state (time saving transition notification) and notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Furthermore, if the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), settings are made to start the right hit notification at the start of the next variation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the super reach reach effect is in progress, in order to draw attention to the super reach reach effect, the time saving transition notification and the right hit notification are not executed, and the right hit in the next variation is performed. It is designed to carry out notifications. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the reach performance of the super reach from being hindered. In addition, even when performances other than the reach performance of Super Reach (such as a preview performance on the image display device 5, an action performance of the movable body 32, a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, etc.), the time-saving transition notification and the right hit notification are not executed. You can also do this. Further, although there are cases where the transition to the time saving state has already been completed when the next fluctuation starts, the time saving transition notification may be executed in the next fluctuation.

Note that although the time-saving transition notification and right-handed game notification are not executed, the right-handed game display is displayed, which can at least indicate that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state. It is possible to reduce the exposure to

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is ended.

FIG. 18-11 is a timing chart showing the contents of the performance at the time of time reduction transition. In FIG. 18-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopping. ON of the "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopping. ON of the "right-handed game image" indicates that a right-handed game image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that a right-handed game image is not displayed.

FIG. 18-11(A) is a timing chart when the super reach effect is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 18-11(A), when the time-saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol while the special symbol is changing, the time-saving shift notification and the right hit notification are executed. In addition, a right hit image is displayed at the timing when the time saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control will be started at the start of the next normal symbol variation. In this way, by executing the time-saving shift notification and the right hit notification during the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol before the time-saving control actually starts, the time-saving shift notification and right-handed notification can be executed to save time even if the time-saving state is changed while the special symbol is changing. It is possible to appropriately notify that the player will move to the current state and play the game by hitting right.

FIG. 18-11(B) is a timing chart when the super reach effect is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in Figure 18-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach effect of the super reach, at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Although the right-handed player image is displayed, time-saving shift notification and right-handed player notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next variation after the end of the variation involving super reach, the right-handed hit notification is executed. In addition, if the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol is already in the time-saving state, so in this example, when the time-saving symbol stops during the super reach reach performance, the next Time-saving notification is not performed at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 18-11(B), if the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol passes after the start of the next variation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next variation.

In addition, if the end timing of the variation of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol stops is before the elapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing at which the time-saving control actually starts, the current special symbol There is no need to rush to execute time-saving shift notification or right-handed notification during fluctuations, so after the start of the next special symbol fluctuation, time-saving transition notification or right-handed notification can be performed during the period before the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. It may also be executed.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the feature section 065AK will be explained. FIGS. 18-12 to 18-14 show an example of the performance operation of the predetermined performance of the feature section 065AK. In FIG. 18-12(A), a downward arrow indicates that the variation of the decorative pattern is being executed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a predetermined performance (regular figure-linked effect, special figure-linked effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Note that the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be displayed on the image display device 5 at all times, or may be displayed when a predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which the predetermined effect is not performed.

When it is determined to perform the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 18-12(B). In FIG. 18-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the effect image is scrolled. Thereafter, the performance result according to the predetermined performance pattern will be notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 18-12(C), an "x" effect image is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is reported that the predetermined performance has failed and the expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or special symbol will be a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 18-12(D), an effect image of "○" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is announced that the predetermined performance is successful and the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 18-12(E), a performance image of musical notes is displayed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is reported that the predetermined performance is successful, that there is a high expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, that a super reach will be executed, etc.

In the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 18-12(F), a performance image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is announced that the predetermined performance is successful, that there is a higher expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, that a super reach will be executed, etc.

In the case of the predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. After that, the result of the predetermined performance (a musical note or a performance image of the word "heat") is displayed. By doing this, when the predetermined effect is executed during reach, it is possible to make the player expect a super reach.

Note that the predetermined performance patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as regular symbol-linked performances, and the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as special symbol-linked performances. Since the common symbol linked performance is executed regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol (ornamental symbol), it can be performed at any timing during the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 18-13 is an example of performance operation when the predetermined performance (ordinary figure linked performance) of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 18-13(A) shows that the decorative symbols are varied in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is determined to perform the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 18-13(B).

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 18-13(C), the effect image of "time" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. Thereby, it is notified that the predetermined performance is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol.

When the time-saving symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 18-13 (D), a right-hitting display instructing a right-handed hit is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a "time-saving entry" is displayed in the center part of the image display device 5. A time-saving shift notification is executed in which an image of the characters "!" is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed in response to the time saving symbol B being displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18-13(E), a right-handed hit notification is executed in which an image of the words "Aim to the right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 18-13(F), the right-handed hit notification image is erased and the right-handed hit notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the special symbols (ornamental symbols) are changing, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the state shifts to the time-saving state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that notifies that the time-saving symbol will stop, and a time-saving shift notification or right-handed hit notification as shown in FIGS. 18-13 (D) and (E) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the transition to the time saving state. This allows the player to continue playing the game without being confused.

FIG. 18-14 is an example of a performance operation when a predetermined performance (normal figure linked performance) of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is executed during a reach performance of super reach. In FIG. 18-14(A), the decorative pattern indicating the number "7" stops in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation of the decorative pattern is executed in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. It shows that it is reachable. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 18-14(B). At this time, the super reach effect is started on the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 18-14(C), the effect image of "time" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. Thereby, it is notified that the predetermined performance is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol.

When the time-saving symbols stop during the super reach performance, a right-hitting display instructing to hit right is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 18-14 (D), but the image display device 5 The short time shift notification and right hit notification are not executed, and the reach effect of super reach continues to be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18-14(E), the decorative pattern showing the number "6" stops in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 18-14 (F), as the next decorative pattern begins to change, an image of the words "Aim to the right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to notify the right-hand hit. is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed in response to the time saving symbol A being displayed. Note that here, the number of times of time saving is subtracted from 50 to 49 as the time saving state is entered during the previous fluctuation and one fluctuation has been completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach effect of super reach, the time reduction transition notification or right hit notification is not executed and the reach effect of super reach takes priority. is executed. When a jackpot is achieved as a result of the super reach, the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, even if the time reduction transition notification is executed during the reach performance of super reach, the notification may be wasted or the performance may be uninteresting, so priority is given to the reach performance of super reach. If the displayed result is a loss, right-handed hitting notification will be executed the next time there is a change, so it is possible to suitably notify that the time-saving state has been reached or that the right-handed hitting will occur. In addition, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach effect of super reach, and the display result of the fluctuation accompanied by the super reach becomes a jackpot, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right hit notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the display result of the normal symbol becoming the time saving symbol in the first change after the end of the jackpot game state. It may also be executed.

(Modified example of characteristic part 065AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably. Further, the performance operation examples shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate as long as the same performance effects can be achieved. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate.

In the case where the display result of the special symbol is pre-read and the pre-read preview performance is executed, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-read preview performance may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the pre-read notice performance may not be executed until the time-saving symbol stops and the state shifts to the time-saving state. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is read in advance and there is pending data for the normal symbol that will become a time-saving symbol, the pre-read preview performance that foretells the display result of the special symbol may be limited. good. By doing this, by changing the game state after executing the pre-reading notice performance, the fluctuation pattern changes between the time of pre-reading and the actual variation execution, and is consistent with the performance content of the pre-reading notice performance. You can prevent this from happening.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during jackpot) and special prize signal (output during jackpot and time saving) as external signals to be output to hall computers and data display machines, we provide a time saving signal (output only during time saving). Good too.

In the above embodiment, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol in the jackpot game state, control to the time-saving state is not performed, but if a jackpot is achieved in a low base state, the jackpot is In the corresponding jackpot game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is the start of the jackpot game state → the start of time-saving control based on the time-saving symbol → the end of the jackpot game state, and the base changes before and after the jackpot game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time reductions based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been controlled may be performed at the start of fluctuation after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if you hit a jackpot in a low base state, the number of time savings is 50 or 100, and if you hit a jackpot in a high base state, the number of time savings is 100, then you can save time during a jackpot gaming state. When the symbols stop, the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of variation after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to suitably transition the state even if the game state changes during the jackpot. Note that when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effects (normal pattern-linked effects, special pattern-linked effects) that suggest or notify the display results of normal symbols or special symbols are performed by scrolling and displaying the effect images in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIG. 18-12 to FIG. 18-14), any performance may be used as long as it can suggest or notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined performance may be a performance that at least indicates whether or not a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol or suggests/informs the display result of a special symbol.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol in a high base state, the time-saving number is not updated, but the display result of a normal symbol in a high base state becomes a time-saving symbol. The number of time reductions may be updated or added when the number of times is reduced. In addition, the determination ratio of the number of time savers and the number of time savers will be different depending on the case where the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time saver symbol in a low base state and the case where the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time saver symbol in a high base state. You can also do this.

In the above example, execution of the time-saving shift notification and right hit notification was restricted in certain cases, such as the reach effect of super reach, but the time-saving pattern was displayed regardless of the content of the effect during execution. When transitioning to the time saving state depending on the situation, a time saving transition notification or a right-hand hit notification may be executed. For example, when executing a time-saving transition notification or right-handed hitting notification on a display means different from the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification or right-handed hitting notification may be executed regardless of the content of the presentation on the image display device 5. good.

(Means related to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 065AK is:
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed variably, and based on the variable display result of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 ( A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a gaming medium easily enters a big winning opening),
The normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) is displayed variably, and based on the variable display result of the normal identification information becoming a predetermined result (for example, a common symbol), the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B (No. 2. A variable control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium into a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which it is easy for the game medium to enter the starting prize opening (2);
a state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The state control means is controllable from the normal state to the special state (for example, step 065AKS018 processing),
The performance execution means includes a specific performance that suggests that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result (for example, a predetermined performance of predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure linked performance) and a variable display result of the normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special performance that suggests that the display result is the special result (for example, a predetermined performance of the predetermined performance pattern SP3, a general map linked performance),
The state control means is capable of controlling the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result ( For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably transition the state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
a predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, time-saving shift notification, right-handed notification) based on the change of the normal variable device to the predetermined state;
The special identification information may be provided with a predetermined notification restriction means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 065AKS106 and 065AKS108) that limits the predetermined notification according to the content of the performance during the variable display of the special identification information. .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the performance during variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect executing means is configured to, in the normal state, cause a variable display result of the normal identification information to be the predetermined result, a variable display result of the normal identification information to be the special result, and a variable display result of the special identification information to be the predetermined result. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the following will be a specific display result (for example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5. Figs. 18-12 and 18-13). You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 18-5),
When starting variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state, the control is performed based on being controlled to the advantageous state depending on whether the special identification information is the normal state or the special state. The conditions for ending the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is finalized is longer than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined result (for example, 18-3(A)).
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the case of the normal state, the time from when the special result is displayed as a variable display result of the normal identification information until it is finalized is longer than when the special state is in the state (for example, Fig. 18-3 (A), ( B)).
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 19-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 19-1, the audio control board 13 in this feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the performance control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 is made to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 19-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F occupying the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 19-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 19-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 19-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T changes according to the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 19-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 19-3(A) to 19-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 19-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 19-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 19-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 19-3(A) to 19-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to be the highest and image data 3 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. The image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3 are displayed with priority.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 19-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player recognizes is a second speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that although this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 19-18 to 19-25), the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 19-18 to 19-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 19-18 to 19-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow-motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, by slowing down the video progress speed of the performance video, a slow motion performance is created in which the progress speed of the reach performance that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 19-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 19-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that compose the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit", as shown in Figure 19-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 19-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 19-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 19-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 19-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 19-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 19-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 19-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 19-7 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 19-8 shows a variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 079SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 19-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in this feature section 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 19-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 19-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the Variation Pattern Judgment Table A for Jackpot. (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 19-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach performance where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach performance of Super Reach α2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach performance, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with the variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

As for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display results that reach the jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the same as the rate at which the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win presentation, which will be described later, is further executed, and the variable display result is a ready-to-win presentation in which the result is a jackpot or a loss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effect can be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic part 069SG, as shown in Figure 19-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α system. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 12 has an area for holding various data used for controlling effect operations, such as the area shown in FIG. 19-11(A) for holding data for effect control. Area 079SG190 is provided. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 19-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 079SG191, a performance control timer setting section 079SG192, a performance control counter setting section 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characteristic section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 19-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 19-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 19-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbol in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIG. 19-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol pending memories has reached the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the holding storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 19-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 19-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up performance determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the latter half of the first ready-to-reach performance or the second half of the third reach-based performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 19-15, if the variable display result is a failure, the decision is made to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and the decision is made not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-27 and 19-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as performance modes of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 19-27 and 19-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 19-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern will be determined to pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 19-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the still image changes color.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining a performance pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion performance determination process, as shown in FIG. 19-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 19-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command; however, the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 19-18 to 19-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 19-18, 19-19, and 19-26 (A) to 19-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means flashing or lighting the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d in synchronization. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 19-18, 19-19, and 19-26 (A) to 19-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. When the battle performance progresses and the first half of the first reach performance execution period reaches the second half, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 19-18 and 19-26 (E) to 19-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 19-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 19-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 19-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 19-19 and 19-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 19-19 and Figures 19-27 (A) to 19-27 (B), when the transition to the second half execution period of the first reach effect continues, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 19-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 19-19 and 19-27 (E) to 19-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of ally character A fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 19-20, 19-21, and 19-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 19-20, 19-21, and 19-28 (A) to 19-28 (B), when moving to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half of the second reach performance comes to an end, as shown in Figures 19-20, 19-21, and 19-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the battle effect video decreases to V2, and the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one will be executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 19-20, 19-21, and 19-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed without changing while maintaining the proceeding speed V3, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the battle production video. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

In addition, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 19-29 (A) to 19-29 (E), the battle performance is used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 19-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the still image display effect will be changed to Figure 19-30 (A ) ~ As shown in Figure 19-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 19-30 (F) ~ Figure 19-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 19-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the failure notification effect is such that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 19-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack until it is defeated by enemy character B without hitting is displayed at a progress speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 19-22, 19-23, and 19-31 (A) to 19-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 19-22, 19-23, and 19-31 (A) to 19-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 19-22 and 19-31 (E) to 19-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 19-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at a traveling speed V2 that is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 19-30 (F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 19-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 19-23 and 19-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach performance.

As shown in Figures 19-23 and 19-32 (A) to Figure 19-32 (B), when the third reach effect transitions to the second half execution period, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 19-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation of the chance-up effect, while the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 19-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up performance, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the performance video of the chance-up performance. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the performance animation of the chance-up performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize from which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 19-23 and 19-32 (E) to 19-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 19-24, 19-25, and 19-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the third reach performance, Character B's attack succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 19-24, 19-25, and 19-33 (A) to 19-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, ally character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, as shown in FIGS. 19-24, 19-25, and 19-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 19-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 19-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by updating the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. In addition, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 19-33 (D) and 19-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19-34(A) to 19-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 19-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 19-34(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 19-34 (D) and 19-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 19-24 and 19-35 (A) to 19-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figure 19-25 and Figures 19-35 (E) to 19-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19-25, as a failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop with a failure combination. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 19-26 (H), Figure 19-27 (H), Figure 19-29 (F), Figure 19-30 (E), Figure 19-30 (I), Figure 19-31 (H), As shown in FIG. 19-32 (H), FIG. 19-35 (D), and FIG. 19-35 (H), in this feature section 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, the telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is illustrated. may be performed, but the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Furthermore, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-19 to 19-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is easy to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect, when playing a jackpot game, etc. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-20, 19-21, 19-24, and 19-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-19 to 19-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect is During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-18 to 19-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the characters are displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-20, 19-21, and 19-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-28(C) and 19-28(D), the number of saturated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the number of saturated lines displayed increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 19-26 (G), Figure 19-29 (E), Figure 19-30 (D), Figure 19-31 (G), and Figure 19-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-28 and 19-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 19-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the caption, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the caption. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19-16 and Figures 19-29(A) to 19-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a form of inverting the color of the still image was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the colors of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see what is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figures 19-19, 19-20, 19-21, 19-23, 19-24, and 19-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 19-18, Figure 19-20, Figure 19-22, Figure 19-24, Figure 19-25 and Figure 19-26 (E) to Figure 19-26 (G), Figure 19-29 (C) ~ Figure 19-29 (E), Figure 19-30 (B) ~ Figure 19-30 (D), Figure 19-31 (E) ~ Figure 19-31 (G), Figure 19-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 19-35 (C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature part 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 19-19, Figure 19-21, Figure 19-23, Figure 19-25, Figure 19-27 (E) to Figure 19-27 (G), Figure 19-30 (F) to Figure 19-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 19-32 (E) to 19-32 (G), and Figures 19-35 (D) to 19-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation animation of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a progress speed V2 that is slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-24 and 19-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, the display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor, may be used.

Also, Figure 19-18, Figure 19-20, Figure 19-22, Figure 19-24, Figure 19-26 (E) to Figure 19-26 (G), Figure 19-29 (C) to Figure 19-29 (E), Figure 19-30 (B) to Figure 19-30 (D), Figure 19-31 (E) to Figure 19-31 (G), Figure 19-35 (A) to Figure 19-35C) As shown, in the jackpot notification performance in this feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. will be displayed at In contrast, Figure 19-19, Figure 19-21, Figure 19-23, Figure 19-25, Figure 19-27 (E) to Figure 19-27 (G), Figure 19-30 (E) to Figure 19- 30(G), FIG. 19-32(E) to FIG. 19-32(G), and FIG. 19-35(D) to FIG. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 19-24, 19-25, and 19-33 (C) to 19-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 19-18 to 19-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stuck. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more reach effects can be executed. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 and 19-37, after the end of the reach effect, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19-36(A) to 19-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 19-36(E) and 19-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 19-37(A) to 19-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 19-37(E) and 19-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 19-36 and 19-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 19-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 and 19-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, telop display, variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to accurately reduce only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 19-38(A) to 19-38(F) as a modification example 079SG-3, it is the same as modification example 079SG-2. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 19-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 19-2(A), it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed telop may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as operation promotion effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-20, 19-21, 19-24, and 19-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. It's okay. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-20, 19-21, 19-24, and 19-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-26, 19-29, 19-30, 19-31, and 19-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance is the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and flashed before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the feature part 059AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature parts such as the feature part 063AK, the feature part 065AK, and the feature part 079SG, as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate. For example, in addition to controlling the time-saving state by displaying the time-saving symbols in a stopped state as in the characteristic part 059AK, the small winning game state ends based on passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 as in the characteristic part 063AK. After that, the time saving state may be controlled for a predetermined period. In addition to this, like the characteristic part 065AK, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the chances of being controlled to be in a time-saving state are increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for example, the time-saving inciting effect in the characteristic part 059AK, the normal time passing inciting effect and the time-saving time inciting effect in the characteristic part 063AK, the predetermined effect in the characteristic part 065AK, and the reach effects of super reach A to super reach C, etc. It may also be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, during the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the predetermined performance after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display on the image display device 5 an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be displayed during the first period. It may be configured such that the speed related to the performance sound can be outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means at the same speed in both the period and the second period. According to this, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed related to the performance sound does not change between the first period and the second period. This can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 75SG001 Pachinko gaming machine 300 First performance unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second performance unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration part 600 Third production unit 800 Fourth production unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The electronic component is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
In the second period, after displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect that displays a still image obtained by freezing the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even while the static presentation is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images